FLINTEC

…the right weigh

Product Catalogue
Load Cells and Accessories No 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Single Point Load Cells

Planar Beam Load Cells

Beam Type Load Cells

Tension Load Cells

Compression Load Cells

Special Sensors

Junction Boxes

Weighing Electronics

Miscellaneous

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

summary

Single Point
Load Cells
Single Point Load Cells
Load Cell Type PC1 PC2/PC2H PC6 PC12 PCB PC22* PC42* PC60*
OIML / NTEP Yes/Yes Yes/No Yes/Yes Yes/No Yes/Yes Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No
EEx (ATEX) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Material Stainless steel Aluminium
Hermetic sealing No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No
Protection IP 67 IP 68 IP 68 IP 68 IP 68 IP 67 IP 67 IP67
Maximum Capacity
kg
5 l l
6 l
10 l l l l
11 l
15 l
20 l l l l l
22 l
30 l l
40 l
50 l l l l l
60
75 l
100 l l l l l
150 l
200 l l l
250 l
next page 300 l
500 l l
750 l
1000 l
2000 l
* Available first quarter 2005

data sheet PC2 PC2H data sheet data sheet

PC1 PC2/PC2H PC6 PC12

price list price list price list price list

data sheet data sheet data sheet data sheet

PCB PC22 PC42 PC60

price list price list price list price list

Characteristics of Single Point Load Cells See next page

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

Single Point
Load Cells
Characteristics of Single Point Load Cells
Usually a Single Point Load Cell is mounted in the center of a scale, directly bolted to the base frame and load
carrier.
Special characteristic is the low sensitivity against off center load.
According the drawing below, the measuring error at off center loading is maximal ± 1 e according to OIML R76
with a load of 1/3 of the nominal scale capacity, positioned in the center of the 4 quadrants.

1 2

Scale platform

4 3
Position of the test weight

Besides the common Aluminium Single Point Load Cells, the Flintec program offers a unique line of hermetically
sealed stainless steel Single Point Load Cells from 10 kg to 2000 kg.
previous page
Typical Applications
Bench and floor scales with platform sizes from 150 x 200 mm to 600 x 800 mm and weighing capacities from 1,5 kg
to 600 kg.
In addition, Single Point Load Cells are used in various special weighing applications.

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Single Point
Load Cells
Type PC1 Load Cell

next page

IP 67
APPROVED

PC1 6 kg and 10 kg

Flintec load cells are designed to meet the most stringent Important Features
accuracy requirements. Certifications have been obtained • Capacity: 6 kg to 200 kg.
from Weights & Measures Authorities, worldwide. • High accuracy.
The PC1 platform load cells are available in the capacities 6 kg • Stainless steel construction.
to 200 kg and include Accuracy Classifications GP, C3, C3 MI 6, • Protection IP 67 (IP 65 for 6 kg and 10 kg).
and C4 according to OIML R 60; NTEP nmax=4500.
• Maximum platform size 600 x 600 mm.
They offer stainless steel construction and improved potting, • Integral mounting spacer.
making them suitable for use in tough industrial environments.
• W&M certified for 5000 intervals
Designed to withstand shock and fatigue loading. (PTB: D09-97.28 Rev. 2).
The off center load performance according OIML allows a • Factory Mutual approved.
maximum platform size of 600 x 600 mm. Option
The version PC1B is available with M10 thread in the capacities • Explosion protection zone 0, 1, 2 and
50 kg, 75 kg and 100 kg. 20, 21, 22 ATEX (except 6 kg and 10 kg).
The PC1 / PC1B is available for use in hazardous areas zone 0, • C3, C3 MI 6 and C4 with Y=15000.
A23 Rev2 UK 1(2)

1, 2 (gas) and 20, 21, 22 (dust) according to EEx ia IIC T6...T4

T150°C ATEX.

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

PC1 Specifications

Single Point
Load Cells
Maximum capacity (Emax) kg 6 / 10 / 15 / 30 / 50 / 75 / 100 / 200
Rated Output (Cn) mV/V 2 ± 0.1
Accuracy class according to OIML R 60 (GP) C3 C3 MI 6 C4
Maximum number of verification intervals (nmax) n.a. 3000 3000 4000
Minimum load cell verification interval (vmin) n.a. Emax /10000
Temperature effect on minimum dead load output %Cn/°C ≤ ± 0.0040 ≤ ± 0.0014
Min. load cell verification interval (vmin) n.a. Emax /15000
Option
Temp. effect on min. dead load output %Cn/°C n.a. ≤ ± 0.00093
Combined error %Cn ≤ ± 0.040 ≤ ± 0.015 ≤ ± 0.012 ≤ ± 0.012
Creep error (30 minutes) / DR %Cn ≤ ± 0.060 ≤ ± 0.024 ≤ ± 0.012 ≤ ± 0.018
Temperature effect on sensitivity %/°C ≤ ± 0.0020 ≤ ± 0.0010 ≤ ± 0.0010 ≤ ± 0.0008
Excitation voltage V 5...15
Zero balance %Cn ≤±5
Input resistance Ω 390 ± 20
Output resistance Ω 330 ± 25
Insulation resistance (100 DC) MΩ ≥ 5000
Compensated temperature range °C –10...+40
Operating temperature range °C –40...+65
Safe load limit (Elim) %Emax 200
Ultimate load %Emax 300
Safe side load %Emax 100
Maximum platform size; loading according OIML mm 350x350 for 6...15 kg / 450x450 for 30...75 kg / 600x600 for 100...200 kg
Maximum off center distance at maximum capacity mm 115 for 6...15 kg / 150 for 30...75 kg / 200 for 100...200 kg
Load cell material stainless steel 17-4 PH (1.4548)
Sealing plastic covered
Protection according DIN 40.050 IP 67*
* Attention: Maximum capacity 6 kg and 10 kg only available with protection IP 65

Dimensions
150
32 19
previous page

40
1.5
10

6 19 100 19

M6* (4x)

6...100 kg 25

M6* (8x)

200 kg 38 25.4

All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.
PC1: Mounting bolts M6 8.8; torque 10 Nm. Torque value assumes oiled threads.
* Unified thread 1/4-20 UNC is available.
PC1B: Mounting bolts M10 8.8; torque 50 Nm (50/75/100 kg). Torque value assumes oiled threads.
If countersunk mounting screws are used, ask for detailed drawing.

Wiring
+ Input (green)
• The load cell is provided with a shielded,
4 conductor cable (AWG 24). Cable jacket polyurethane.
+ Output (white)
• Cable length: 3 m.
A23 Rev2 UK 2(2)

• Cable diameter: 5 mm.

– Input (black)
• The shield is connected to the load cell body.
– Output (red)
Shield (yellow)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Single Point
Load Cells
Type PC2 kg Load Cell

next page

IP 68
APPROVED

Flintec load cells are designed to meet the most stringent Important Features
accuracy requirements. • Capacities 20 and 150 kg.
The PC2 load cell is available in the capacities 20 and 150 kg • High accuracy.
and include Accuracy Classifications GP and C3 according to • Total stainless steel construction.
OIML R 60. • Complete hermetic sealing.
Total stainless steel construction and complete hermetic • Protection IP 68.
sealing, making the cell suitable for use in the toughest • Maximum platform size 1000 x 1000 mm.
industrial environments.
• High input resistance: 1100 W.
Designed to withstand shock and fatigue loading. • No additional flexures required.
Applications are platform scales, hopper and tank weighing • Easy cable replacement.
systems. • Factory Mutual approved.
The off center load performance according OIML allows a Option
maximum platform size of 1000 x 1000 mm. • Explosion protection zone 0, 1, 2 and
The PC2 is available for use in hazardous areas zone 0, 1, 2 20, 21, 22 ATEX.
(gas) and 20, 21, 22 (dust) according to EEx ia IIC T6...T4
T130°C ATEX.
A27 Rev1 UK 1(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

PC2 Specifications

Single Point
Load Cells
Maximum capacity (Emax) kg 20 / 150
Rated Output (Cn) mV/V 2 ± 5%
Accuracy class according to OIML R 60 (GP) C3
Maximum number of verification intervals (nmax) n.a. 3000
Minimum load cell verification interval (vmin) n.a. Emax /10000
Combined error %Cn ≤ ± 0.040 ≤ ± 0.020
Creep error (30 minutes) %Cn ≤ ± 0.060 ≤ ± 0.016
Temperature effect on minimum dead load output %Cn/°C ≤ ± 0.0040 ≤ ± 0.0012
Temperature effect on sensitivity %/°C ≤ ± 0.0020 ≤ ± 0.0011
Excitation voltage V 5...15
Zero balance %Cn ≤±5
Input resistance Ω 1100 ± 50
Output resistance Ω 960 ± 50
Insulation resistance MΩ ≥ 5000
Compensated temperature range °C –10...+40
Operating temperature range °C –40...+80
Safe load limit (Elim) %Emax 200
Ultimate load %Emax 300
Safe side load %Emax 100
Maximum platform size; loading according OIML mm 600 x 600 for 20kg / 1000 x 1000 for 150 kg
Maximum off center distance at maximum capacity mm 250 for 20 kg / 400 for 150 kg
Load cell material stainless steel 17-4 PH (1.4548)
Sealing complete hermetic sealing; cable entry sealed by using a glass to metal header
Protection according DIN 40.050 IP 68

Dimensions

100 41 49.5

previous page

75 57.2

M10 (8x)

13 31.8

All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.
Mounting bolts M10 8.8; torque 50 Nm. Torque value assumes oiled threads.

Wiring
+ Input (green)
• The load cell is provided with a shielded,
4 conductor cable (AWG 24). Cable jacket polyurethane.
+ Output (white)
• Cable length: 3 m.
A27 Rev1 UK 2(2)

• Cable diameter: 5 mm.

– Input (black)
• The shield is floating (On request the shield can be connected
– Output (red)
to the load cell body).
Shield (yellow)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Single Point
Load Cells
Type PC2H Load Cell

next page

IP 68

Flintec load cells are designed to meet the most stringent Important Features
accuracy requirements.Certifications have been obtained from • Capacity 2000 kg.
Weights & Measures Authorities, worldwide. • High accuracy.
This PC2H load cell is available in the capacity 2000 kg and • Total stainless steel construction.
include Accuracy Classification GP and C3 according to OIML • Complete hermetic sealing.
R 60.
• Protection IP 68.
Total stainless steel construction and complete hermetic • W&M certified for 3000 intervals
sealing, making the cell suitable for use in the toughest (in preparation).
industrial environments.
• Maximum platform size 1200 x 1200 mm.
Designed to withstand shock and fatigue loading. • High input resistance: 1100 W.
Applications are on-board weighing, platform scales, hopper • No additional flexures required.
and tank weighing systems. Option
The off center load performance according OIML allows a • Explosion protection zone 0, 1, 2 and
maximum platform size of 1200 x 1200 mm. 20, 21, 22 ATEX.
The PC2H is available for use in hazardous areas zone 0, 1, 2
(gas) and 20, 21, 22 (dust) according to EEx ia IIC T6...T4
T130°C ATEX.
A109 Rev1 UK 1(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

PC2H Specifications

Single Point
Load Cells
Maximum capacity (Emax) kg 2000
Rated Output (Cn) mV/V 2 ± 10%
Accuracy class according to OIML R 60 (GP) C3
Maximum number of verification intervals (nmax) n.a. 3000
Minimum load cell verification interval (vmin) n.a. Emax /10000
Combined error %Cn < ± 0.040 < ± 0.020
Creep error (30 minutes) / DR %Cn < ± 0.060 < ± 0.016
Temperature effect on minimum dead load output %Cn/°C < ± 0.0040 < ± 0.0012
Temperature effect on sensitivity %/°C < ± 0.0020 < ± 0.0011
Excitation voltage V 5...15
Zero balance %Cn <±5
Input resistance W 1100 ± 50
Output resistance W 960 ± 50
Insulation resistance MW > 5000
Compensated temperature range °C –10...+40
Operating temperature range °C –40...+80
Safe load limit (Elim) %Emax 150
Ultimate load %Emax 300
Safe side load %Emax 100
Maximum platform size; loading according OIML mm 1200 x 1200
Maximum off center distance at maximum capacity mm 400
Load cell material stainless steel 17-4 PH (1.4548)
Sealing hermetic sealing; cable entry sealed by using cable gland PG7 and potting
Protection according DIN 40.050 IP 68

Dimensions
176 46

previous page M16 (8x)

126 64 95

PROTECTIVE COVER
76
6 mm thick
2 sides

All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.
Mounting bolts M16 8.8; torque 200 Nm. Torque value assumes oiled threads.

Wiring
+ Input (green)
• The load cell is provided with a shielded,
4 conductor cable (AWG 24). Cable jacket polyurethane.
+ Output (white)
• Cable length: 3 m.
A109 Rev1 UK 2(2)

• Cable diameter: 5 mm.

– Input (black)
• The shield is floating (On request the shield can be connected
– Output (red)
to the load cell body).
Shield (yellow)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Single Point
Load Cells
Type PC6 Load Cell

next page

IP 68
APPROVED

Flintec load cells are designed to meet the most stringent Important Features
accuracy requirements. Certifications have been obtained • Capacities: 10 kg to 200 kg.
from Weights & Measures Authorities, worldwide. • High accuracy.
PC6 platform load cells are available in the capacities 10 kg to • Total stainless steel construction.
200 kg and include Accuracy Classifications GP, C3, C3 MI 6, • Complete hermetic sealing.
C3 MI 12 and C4 according to OIML R 60.
• Protection IP 68.
They offer total stainless steel construction and complete • Maximum platform size 600 x 600 mm.
hermetic sealing, making them suitable for use in the toughest
• Integral mounting spacer.
industrial environments.
• High input resistance: 1100 Ω.
Designed to withstand shock and fatigue loading.
• W&M certified for 4000 intervals
The off center load performance according OIML allows a (PTB: D09-00.02 Rev. 4).
maximum platform size of 600 x 600 mm. • Easy cable replacement.
The PC6 is available for use in hazardous areas zone 0, 1, 2 • Factory Mutual approved.
(gas) and 20, 21, 22 (dust) according to EEx ia IIC T6...T4 Option
T130°C ATEX.
• Explosion protection zone 0, 1, 2 and
20, 21, 22 ATEX.
• C3, C3 MI 6, C3 MI 12 and C4 with
Y=22000.
A28 Rev2 UK 1(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

PC6 Specifications

Single Point
Load Cells
Maximum capacity (Emax) kg 10 / 11 / 20 / 22 / 50 / 100 / 200 100 / 200
Rated Output (Cn) mV/V 2 ± 5% (2.2 ± 5% for 11 and 22 kg)
Accuracy class according to OIML R 60 (GP) C3 C3 MI 6 C4 C3 MI 12
Maximum number of verification intervals (nmax) n.a. 3000 3000 4000 3000
Minimum load cell verification interval (vmin) n.a. Emax /10000 (Emax /11000 for 11 and 22 kg)
Temperature effect on minimum dead load output %Cn/°C ≤ ± 0.0040 ≤ ± 0.0014 (≤ ± 0.0012 for 11 and 22 kg)
Min. load cell verification interval (vmin) n.a. Emax /20000 (Emax /22000 for 11 and 22 kg)
Option
Temp. effect on min. dead load output %Cn/°C n.a. ≤ ± 0.0007 (≤ ± 0.0006 for 11 and 22 kg)
Combined error %Cn ≤ ± 0.040 ≤ ± 0.020 ≤ ± 0.020 ≤ ± 0.018 ≤ ± 0.020
Creep error (30 minutes) / DR %Cn ≤ ± 0.060 ≤ ± 0.016 ≤ ± 0.008 ≤ ± 0.012 ≤ ± 0.004
Temperature effect on sensitivity %/°C ≤ ± 0.0020 ≤ ± 0.0010 ≤ ± 0.0010 ≤ ± 0.0008 ≤ ± 0.0010
Excitation voltage V 5...15
Zero balance %Cn ≤±5
Input resistance Ω 1100 ± 50
Output resistance Ω 960 ± 50
Insulation resistance (100 DC) MΩ ≥ 5000
Compensated temperature range °C –10...+40
Operating temperature range °C –40...+80
Safe load limit (Elim) %Emax 200
Ultimate load %Emax 300
Safe side load %Emax 100
Maximum platform size; loading according OIML mm 350x350 for 10...22 kg / 450x450 for 50 kg / 600x600 for 100...200 kg
Maximum off center distance at maximum capacity mm 115 for 10...22 kg / 150 for 50 kg / 200 for 100...200 kg
Load cell material stainless steel 17-4 PH (1.4548)
Sealing complete hermetic sealing; cable entry sealed by glass to metal header
Protection according DIN 40.050 IP 68

Dimensions
15.2 67.8 15.2
1.2
previous page 16.3

48

1.2 15

122 41

30

15.2 M6* (8x)

All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.
Mounting bolts M6 8.8; torque 10 Nm. Torque value assumes oiled threads.
* Unified thread 1/4-20 UNC is available.

Wiring
+ Input (green)
• The load cell is provided with a shielded,
4 conductor cable (AWG 24). Cable jacket polyurethane.
+ Output (white)
• Cable length: 3 m.
A28 Rev2 UK 2(2)

• Cable diameter: 5 mm.

– Input (black)
• The shield is floating.
– Output (red)
(On request 6 conductor cable and the shield connected to the Shield (yellow)
load cell body available)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Single Point
Load Cells
Type PC12 Load Cell

next page

IP 68

Flintec load cells are designed to meet the most stringent Important Features
accuracy requirements. Certifications have been obtained • Capacity 20 kg.
from Weights & Measures Authorities, worldwide. • High accuracy.
PC12 platform load cell is available in the capacity 20 kg and • Total stainless steel construction.
include Accuracy Classifications C3, C3 MI 6, and C4 with • Complete hermetic sealing.
Y=20000 according to OIML R 60.
• Protection IP 68.
They offer total stainless steel construction and complete
hermetic sealing, making them suitable for use in the toughest • Maximum platform size 600 x 600 mm.
industrial environments. • High input resistance: 1100 Ω.
Designed to withstand shock and fatigue loading. • W&M certified for 4000 intervals and
Y=20000 (in preparation).
The off center load performance according OIML allows a
• Easy cable replacement.
maximum platform size of 600 x 600 mm.
Option
The PC12 is available for use in hazardous areas zone 0, 1, 2
• Explosion protection zone 0, 1, 2 and
(gas) and 20, 21, 22 (dust) according to EEx ia IIC T6...T4
20, 21, 22 ATEX.
T130°C ATEX.
A35 Rev1 UK 1(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

PC12 Specifications

Single Point
Load Cells
Maximum capacity (Emax) kg 20
Rated Output (Cn) mV/V 2 ± 5%
Accuracy class according to OIML R 60 C3 C3 MI 6 C4
Maximum number of verification intervals (nmax) 3000 3000 4000
Minimum load cell verification interval (vmin) Emax /20000
Combined error %Cn ≤ ± 0.020 ≤ ± 0.020 ≤ ± 0.018
Creep error (30 minutes) / DR %Cn ≤ ± 0.016 ≤ ± 0.008 ≤ ± 0.012
Temperature effect on minimum dead load output %Cn/°C ≤ ± 0.0006 ≤ ± 0.0006 ≤ ± 0.0006
Temperature effect on sensitivity %/°C ≤ ± 0.0011 ≤ ± 0.0011 ≤ ± 0.0008
Excitation voltage V 5...15
Zero balance %Cn ≤±5
Input resistance Ω 1100 ± 50
Output resistance Ω 960 ± 50
Insulation resistance (100 DC) MΩ ≥ 5000
Compensated temperature range °C –10...+40
Operating temperature range °C –40...+80
Safe load limit (Elim) %Emax 200
Ultimate load %Emax 300
Safe side load %Emax 100
Maximum platform size; loading according OIML mm 600 x 6 00
Maximum off center distance at maximum capacity mm 200
Load cell material stainless steel 17-4 PH (1.4548)
Sealing complete hermetic sealing; cable entry sealed by glass to metal header
Protection according DIN 40.050 IP 68

Dimensions
5 20 80 20

18

previous page

70

18

20
130 21
M6 (10 deep)
8x 20

45 35

All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.
Mounting bolts M6 8.8; torque 10 Nm. Torque value assumes oiled threads.

Wiring
+ Input (green)
• The load cell is provided with a shielded,
4 conductor cable (AWG 24). Cable jacket polyurethane.
+ Output (white)
• Cable length: 3 m.
A35 Rev1 UK 2(2)

• Cable diameter: 5 mm.

– Input (black)
• The shield is floating.
– Output (red)
(On request 6 conductor cable and the shield connected to the Shield (yellow)
load cell body available)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Single Point
Load Cells
Type PCB Load Cell

next page

IP 68

Flintec load cells are designed to meet the most stringent Important Features
accuracy requirements. Certifications have been obtained • Capacities: 50 kg to 1000 kg.
from Weights & Measures Authorities, worldwide. • High accuracy.
PCB load cells are available in the capacities 50 kg to 1000 kg • Total stainless steel construction.
and include Accuracy Classifications GP, C3, C3 MI 6, C5 and • Complete hermetic sealing.
C5 MI 7.5 according to OIML R 60; NTEP nmax=3000.
• Protection IP 68.
They offer total stainless steel construction and complete • Maximum platform size 1000 x 1000 mm.
hermetic sealing, making them suitable for use in the toughest
• High input resistance: 1100 Ω.
industrial environments.
• W&M certified for 5000 intervals.
Designed to withstand shock and fatigue loading. (PTB: D09-01.02 Rev. 1)
Applications are platform scales, hopper and tank weighing • No additional flexures required.
systems. • Easy cable replacement.
The off center load performance according OIML allows a Option
maximum platform size of 1000 x 1000 mm. • Explosion protection zone 0, 1, 2 and
The version PCBB is available with M12 thread in the capacities 20, 21, 22 ATEX.
500 kg and 1000 kg. • C3, C3 MI 6, C5 and C5 MI 7.5 with
The PCB / PCBB is available for use in hazardous areas zone 0, Y=20000.
1, 2 (gas) and 20, 21, 22 (dust) according to EEx ia IIC T6...T4
T130°C ATEX.
A52 Rev1 UK 1(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

PCB Specifications

Single Point
Load Cells
Maximum capacity (Emax ) kg 50 / 100 / 250 / 500 / 1000 50 / 100 / 250
Rated Output (Cn) mV/V 2 ± 5%
Accuracy class according to OIML R 60 (GP) C3 C3 MI 6 C5 C5 MI 7.5
Maximum number of verification intervals (nmax) n.a. 3000 3000 5000 5000
Minimum load cell verification interval Emax /12500
n.a.
(vmin )
Temperature effect on minimum dead load output %Cn/°C ≤ ± 0.0040 ≤ ± 0.0011
Min. load cell verification interval (vmin ) n.a. Emax /20000
Option
Temp. effect on min. dead load output %Cn/°C n.a. ≤ ± 0.0007
Combined error %Cn ≤ ± 0.040 ≤ ± 0.020 ≤ ± 0.018 ≤ ± 0.015 ≤ ± 0.014
Creep error (30 minutes) / DR %Cn ≤ ± 0.060 ≤ ± 0.016 ≤ ± 0.008 ≤ ± 0.016 ≤ ± 0.006
Temperature effect on sensitivity %/°C ≤ ± 0.0020 ≤ ± 0.0011 ≤ ± 0.0011 ≤ ± 0.0007 ≤ ± 0.0007
Excitation voltage V 5...15
Zero balance %Cn ≤±5
Input resistance Ω 1100 ± 50
Output resistance Ω 960 ± 50
Insulation resistance (100 V DC) MΩ ≥ 5000
Compensated temperature range °C –10...+40
Operating temperature range °C –40...+80
Safe load limit (Elim) %Emax 200
Ultimate load %Emax 300
Safe side load %Emax 100
Maximum platform size; loading according OIML mm 600 x 600 for 50 kg / 800 x 800 for 100...500 kg / 1000 x 1000 for 1000 kg
Maximum off center distance at maximum capacity mm 200 for 50 kg / 250 for 100...500 kg / 300 for 1000 kg
Load cell material stainless steel 17-4 PH (1.4548)
Sealing complete hermetic sealing; cable entry sealed by glass to metal header
Protection according DIN 40.050 IP 68

Dimensions
190.5 41
8 L1 L2 L1
previous page
H 1.5

73.7

1.5

D (8x)

73.7 W

Type L1 L2 H W D Mounting bolts** Torque*

PCB-50/100/250/500/1000 kg 25 125 19 60 M8 M8 8.8 25 Nm
PCBB-500/1000 kg 35 105 30 57 M12 M12 8.8 90 Nm
Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.
* Torque values assume oiled threads.
** Unified thread 5/16-18 UNC is available (PCB only).

Wiring
+ Input (green)
• The load cell is provided with a shielded,
4 conductor cable (AWG 24). Cable jacket polyurethane.
+ Output (white)
• Cable length: 3 m.
A52 Rev1 UK 2(2)

• Cable diameter: 5 mm.

– Input (black)
• The shield is floating.
– Output (red)
(On request 6 conductor cable and the shield connected to the Shield (yellow)
load cell body available)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Single Point
Load Cells
Type PC22 Load Cell

next page

IP 67

Flintec load cells are designed to meet the most stringent Important Features
accuracy requirements. Certifications have been obtained • Capacity: 5 kg to 40 kg.
from Weights & Measures Authorities, worldwide. • High accuracy.
The PC22 platform load cells are available in the capacities 5 kg • Aluminium construction.
to 40 kg and include Accuracy Classifications GP and C3 • Protection IP 67.
according to OIML R 60.
• Maximum platform size 350 x 350 mm.
They offer aluminium construction and improved potting, • W&M certified for 3000 intervals.
making them suitable for use in industrial environments.
Option
The off center load performance according OIML allows a • Explosion protection zone 0, 1, 2 and
maximum platform size of 350 x 350 mm. 20, 21, 22 ATEX.
The PC22 is available for use in hazardous areas zone 0, 1, 2 • C3 with Y=15000.
(gas) and 20, 21, 22 (dust) according to EEx ia IIC T6...T4
T150°C ATEX.
A89 Rev1 UK 1(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

PC22 Specifications

Single Point
Load Cells
Maximum capacity (Emax) kg 5 / 10 / 20 / 30 / 40
Rated Output (Cn) mV/V 2 ± 10%
Accuracy class according to OIML R 60 (GP) C3
Maximum number of verification intervals (nmax) n.a. 3000
Minimum load cell verification interval (vmin) n.a. Emax /6000
Temperature effect on minimum dead load output %Cn/°C ≤ ± 0.0040 ≤ ± 0.0023
Min. load cell verification interval (vmin) n.a. Emax /15000
Option
Temp. effect on min. dead load output %Cn/°C n.a. ≤ ± 0.0009
Combined error %Cn ≤ ± 0.040 ≤ ± 0.020
Creep error (30 minutes) / DR %Cn ≤ ± 0.060 ≤ ± 0.016
Temperature effect on sensitivity %/°C ≤ ± 0.0020 ≤ ± 0.0011
Excitation voltage V 5...15
Zero balance %Cn ≤±5
Input resistance Ω 413 ± 20
Output resistance Ω 350 ± 25
Insulation resistance (100 V DC) MΩ ≥ 5000
Compensated temperature range °C –10...+40
Operating temperature range °C –20...+65
Safe load limit (Elim) %Emax 150
Ultimate load %Emax 300
Safe side load %Emax 100
Maximum platform size; loading according OIML mm 350 x 350
Maximum off center distance at maximum capacity mm 115
Load cell material aluminium
Sealing potted
Protection according DIN 40.050 IP 67

Dimensions
130
previous page 106 12

22

Capacity W 25
5 kg 25.4
105
10, 20, 30, 40 kg 30
M6* (2x) M6* (2x)
10 deep

W 15

All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.
Mounting bolts M6 8.8; torque 10 Nm. Torque value assumes oiled threads.
* Unified thread 1/4-20 UNC is available.

Wiring
+ Input (green)
• The load cell is provided with a shielded,
4 conductor cable (AWG 24). Cable jacket polyurethane.
+ Output (white)
• Cable length: 0.5 m.
A89 Rev1 UK 2(2)

• Cable diameter: 5 mm.

– Input (black)
• The shield is connected to the load cell body.
– Output (red)
Shield (yellow)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Single Point
Load Cells
Type PC42 Load Cell

next page

IP 67

Flintec load cells are designed to meet the most stringent Important Features
accuracy requirements. Certifications have been obtained • Capacity: 5 kg to 100 kg.
from Weights & Measures Authorities, worldwide. • High accuracy.
The PC42 platform load cells are available in the capacities 5 kg • Aluminium construction.
to 100 kg and include Accuracy Classifications GP and C3 • Protection IP 67.
according to OIML R 60.
• Maximum platform size 400 x 400 mm.
They offer aluminium construction and improved potting, • W&M certified for 3000 intervals.
making them suitable for use in industrial environments.
Option
The off center load performance according OIML allows a • Explosion protection zone 0, 1, 2 and
maximum platform size of 400 x 400 mm. 20, 21, 22 ATEX.
The PC42 is available for use in hazardous areas zone 0, 1, 2 • C3 with Y=15000.
(gas) and 20, 21, 22 (dust) according to EEx ia IIC T6...T4
T150°C ATEX.
A90 Rev1 UK 1(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

PC42 Specifications

Single Point
Load Cells
Maximum capacity (Emax) kg 5 / 10 / 20 / 30 / 50 / 100
/Rated Output (Cn) mV/V 2 ± 10%
Accuracy class according to OIML R 60 (GP) C3
Maximum number of verification intervals (nmax) n.a. 3000
Minimum load cell verification interval (vmin) n.a. Emax /6000
Temperature effect on minimum dead load output %Cn/°C ≤ ± 0.0040 ≤ ± 0.0023
Min. load cell verification interval (vmin) n.a. Emax /15000
Option
Temp. effect on min. dead load output %Cn/°C n.a. ≤ ± 0.0009
Combined error %Cn ≤ ± 0.040 ≤ ± 0.020
Creep error (30 minutes) / DR %Cn ≤ ± 0.060 ≤ ± 0.016
Temperature effect on sensitivity %/°C ≤ ± 0.0020 ≤ ± 0.0011
Excitation voltage V 5...15
Zero balance %Cn ≤±5
Input resistance Ω 413 ± 20
Output resistance Ω 350 ± 25
Insulation resistance (100 V DC) MΩ ≥ 5000
Compensated temperature range °C –10...+40
Operating temperature range °C –20...+65
Safe load limit (Elim) %Emax 150
Ultimate load %Emax 300
Safe side load %Emax 100
Maximum platform size; loading according OIML mm 400 x 400
Maximum off center distance at maximum capacity mm 135
Load cell material aluminium
Sealing potted
Protection according DIN 40.050 IP 67

Dimensions
150
previous page 19 100 25

40

1 34 Capacity W 19 13
5, 10, 20, 30 kg 20 34
50, 100 kg 25.4
M6* (4x)

All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.
Mounting bolts M6 8.8; torque 10 Nm. Torque value assumes oiled threads.
* Unified thread 1/4-20 UNC is available.

Wiring
+ Input (green)
• The load cell is provided with a shielded, + Sense (blue)
6 conductor cable (AWG 26). Cable jacket polyurethane.
+ Output (white)
• Cable length: 1 m.
A90 Rev1 UK 2(2)

• Cable diameter: 5.8 mm. – Sense (brown)

– Input (black)
• The shield is connected to the load cell body.
– Output (red)
Shield (yellow)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Single Point
Load Cells
Type PC60 Load Cell

next page

IP 67

Flintec load cells are designed to meet the most stringent Important Features
accuracy requirements. Certifications have been obtained • Capacity: 30 kg to 750 kg.
from Weights & Measures Authorities, worldwide. • High accuracy.
The PC60 platform load cells are available in the capacities • Aluminium construction.
30 kg to 750 kg and include Accuracy Classifications GP and • Protection IP 67.
C3 according to OIML R 60.
• Maximum platform size 600 x 600 mm.
They offer aluminium construction and improved potting, • W&M certified for 3000 intervals.
making them suitable for use in industrial environments.
Option
The off center load performance according OIML allows a • Explosion protection zone 0, 1, 2 and
maximum platform size of 600 x 600 mm. 20, 21, 22 ATEX.
The PC60 is available for use in hazardous areas zone 0, 1, 2 • C3 with Y=15000.
(gas) and 20, 21, 22 (dust) according to EEx ia IIC T6...T4
T150°C ATEX.
A91 Rev1 UK 1(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

PC60 Specifications

Single Point
Load Cells
Maximum capacity (Emax) kg 30 / 50 / 100 / 200 / 300 / 500 / 750
Rated Output (Cn) mV/V 2 ± 10%
Accuracy class according to OIML R 60 (GP) C3
Maximum number of verification intervals (nmax) n.a. 3000
Minimum load cell verification interval (vmin) n.a. Emax /6000
Temperature effect on minimum dead load output %Cn/°C ≤ ± 0.0040 ≤ ± 0.0023
Min. load cell verification interval (vmin) n.a. Emax /15000
Option
Temp. effect on min. dead load output %Cn/°C n.a. ≤ ± 0.0009
Combined error %Cn ≤ ± 0.040 ≤ ± 0.020
Creep error (30 minutes) / DR %Cn ≤ ± 0.060 ≤ ± 0.016
Temperature effect on sensitivity %/°C ≤ ± 0.0020 ≤ ± 0.0011
Excitation voltage V 5...15
Zero balance %Cn ≤±5
Input resistance Ω 413 ± 20
Output resistance Ω 350 ± 25
Insulation resistance (100 V DC) MΩ ≥ 5000
Compensated temperature range °C –10...+40
Operating temperature range °C –20...+65
Safe load limit (Elim) %Emax 150
Ultimate load %Emax 300
Safe side load %Emax 100
Maximum platform size; loading according OIML mm 600 x 600
Maximum off center distance at maximum capacity mm 200
Load cell material aluminium
Sealing potted
Protection according DIN 40.050 IP 67

Dimensions
188
52
previous page 35 107 35 5.5

62.3

15
*M8 (8x) 52

63.5 50

All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.
Mounting bolts M8 8.8; torque 25 Nm. Torque value assumes oiled threads.
* Unified thread 5/16-18 UNC is available.

Wiring
+ Input (green)
• The load cell is provided with a shielded, + Sense (blue)
6 conductor cable (AWG 26). Cable jacket polyurethane.
+ Output (white)
• Cable length: 3 m.
A91 Rev1 UK 2(2)

• Cable diameter: 5.8 mm. – Sense (brown)

– Input (black)
• The shield is connected to the load cell body.
– Output (red)
Shield (yellow)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

summary

Planar Beam Load Cells

Load Cell Type CPB PB PBW ZLB
OIML / NTEP No/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No
EEx (ATEX) No No No Yes
Material Aluminium

Planar Beam
Load Cells
Hermetic sealing No No No No
Protection IP 65 IP 65 IP 65 IP 67
Maximum Capacity *
kg lb
3 l
3.75 l
5.7 12.5 l
6 l
7.5 l
8.5 18.75 l
11.3 25 l
15 l l
17 37.5 l
20 l
22.7 50 l
30 l
37.5 l
45.4 100 l
50 l
60 l
next page 75 l
91 200 l
100 l
136 300 l
150 l
200 l
375 l
* The load cells are calibrated in kg or lb depending on load cell type (bold print).

data sheet data sheet data sheet data sheet

CPB PB PBW ZLB

price list price list price list price list

Characteristics of Planar Beam Load Cells / Load Mounts See next page

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

Characteristics of Planar Beams

Planar Beams are a unique Flintec design. The characteristics are low profile, and fairly low cost. The range covers
nominal capacities from 3,7 kg to 375 kg.
Scales are built with 3 or 4 type PB Planar Beams and a suitable load introduction. The type CPB, is a Single Point
Load Cell and is used alone.
The use of Planar Beams (PB type) eliminates restrictions regarding the size of the platform compared to Single

Planar Beam
Load Cells
Point Load Cells.

Typical Applications
Bench, and platform scales, as well as special applications in medical, retail, and other areas.

Load Mounts for Planar Beam Load Cells

Type PB ZLB
Rubber load mount for PB l
Rubber load mount for ZLB l

data sheet data sheet

for PB for ZLB

previous page

price list price list

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type CPB Load Cell

Planar Beam
Load Cells
next page

Flintec load cells are designed to meet the most stringent Important Features
accuracy requirements. • Capacities: 3 kg to 60 kg.
The unique, very low profile Compact Planar Beam load cells • High accuracy.
offer a very low scale profile design while at the same time • Very low profile.
offering 3000 divisions scale performance. • Maximum platform size 350 x 350 mm.
CPB platform load cells are available in the capacities 3 kg to
60 kg. and include Accuracy Classifications GP and C3
according to OIML R 60.
The off center load performance according OIML allows a
maximum platform size of 350 x 350 mm.
One single load cell can be employed, directly coupled to the
weighing platform and the supporting base, “Spiders” are not
required in this configuration.
A42 Rev1 UK 1(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

CPB Specifications
Maximum capacity (Emax) kg 3 / 6 / 15 / 30 / 60
Rated Output (Cn) mV/V 1 ± 10%
Accuracy class according to OIML R 60 (GP) C3
Maximum number of verification intervals (nmax) n.a. 3000
Minimum load cell verification interval (vmin) n.a. Emax /7500
Combined error %Cn ≤ ± 0.040 ≤ ± 0.020
Creep error (30 minutes) / DR %Cn ≤ ± 0.060 ≤ ± 0.016

Planar Beam
Load Cells
Temperature effect on minimum dead load output %Cn/°C ≤ ± 0.0040 ≤ ± 0.0014
Temperature effect on sensitivity %/°C ≤ ± 0.0020 ≤ ± 0.0011
Excitation voltage V 5...15
Zero balance %Cn ≤±5
Input resistance Ω 390 ± 20
Output resistance Ω 330 ± 25
Insulation resistance (100 V DC) MΩ ≥ 5000
Compensated temperature range °C –10...+40
Operating temperature range °C –10...+65
Safe load limit (Elim) %Emax 300
Ultimate load %Emax 400
Safe side load %Emax 200
Maximum platform size; loading according OIML mm 300 x 300 for 3 to 15 kg / 350 x 350 for 30 and 60 kg
Load cell material aluminium
Sealing environmentally sealed
Protection according DIN 40.050 IP 65

Dimensions

8 min. 79
top spacer
dimension H H
3...15 kg 7.9
30...60 kg 12.7
previous page
4 min. 79
bottom spacer
177.8
12.7 65.9 65.9 12.7

coating
Ø6.8(8x)
M6(8x)

60.4
127 47.6 28.6
(spacer)

All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.

Wiring
+ Input (green)
• The load cell is provided with a 4 conductor ribbon cable.
• Cable length: 250 mm.
+ Output (white)
A42 Rev1 UK 2(2)

– Input (black)
– Output (red)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type PB Load Cell

Planar Beam
Load Cells
next page

Flintec load cells are designed to meet the most stringent Important Features
accuracy requirements. Certifications have been obtained • Capacities: 3.75 kg to 375 kg.
from Weights & Measures Authorities, worldwide. • Scale capacity: 6 kg to 600 kg.
The unique, very low profile Planar Beam load cells offer very • High accuracy.
low scale profile design while at the same time offering 4000 • W&M certified for 4000 intervals
divisions scale performance. (PTB: D09-03.03 Rev.1).
PB platform load cells are available in the capacities 3.75 kg to • Very low profile.
375 kg; offering recommended scale capacities from 6 kg to • Calibration in mV/V/Ω for C3 classification.
600 kg by using 4 PB load cells.
Mounting parts
Available in the Accuracy Classifications GP, C3, C3 MI 6 and
C4 according to OIML R 60. • Load mount (See page 34).

They are used in each corner resulting in a “full load cell scale”
with maximum mechanical stability. “Spiders” are eliminated as
well as the platform size limitations dictated by conventional
single point load cells.
The Flintec calibration technique (in mV/V/Ω) for the C3,
C3 MI 6 and 4 classification eliminates time consuming corner
calibration in multiple load cell systems.
A32 Rev1 UK 1(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

PB Specifications
Maximum capacity (Emax) kg 3.75 / 7.5 / 15 / 37.5 / 75 / 150 / 375 375
Recommended scale capacity (Max = 400% Emax) kg 6 / 15 / 30 / 60 / 150 / 300 / 600 600
Rated Output (Cn) mV/V 1 ± 10% 0.9 ± 0.1%
Calibration in mV/V/Ω %Cn n.a. ≤ ± 0.05
Accuracy class according to OIML R 60 (GP) C3 C3 MI 6 C4
Maximum number of verification intervals (nmax) n.a. 3000 3000 4000
Minimum load cell verification interval (vmin) n.a. Emax /7500

Planar Beam
Load Cells
Combined error %Cn ≤ ± 0.040 ≤ ± 0.020 ≤ ± 0.020 ≤ ± 0.018
Creep error (30 minutes) / DR %Cn ≤ ± 0.060 ≤ ± 0.016 ≤ ± 0.008 ≤ ± 0.012
Temperature effect on minimum dead load output %Cn/°C ≤ ± 0.0040 ≤ ± 0.0018 ≤ ± 0.0018 ≤ ± 0.0018
Temperature effect on sensitivity %/°C ≤ ± 0.0020 ≤ ± 0.0011 ≤ ± 0.0011 ≤ ± 0.0008
Excitation voltage V 5...15
Zero balance %Cn ≤±5
Input resistance Ω 1180 ± 50
Output resistance Ω 1000 ± 10
Insulation resistance (100 V DC) MΩ ≥ 5000
Compensated temperature range °C –10...+40
Operating temperature range °C –10...+65
Safe load limit (Elim) %Emax 300
Ultimate load %Emax 400
Safe side load %Emax 200
Load cell material aluminium
Sealing environmentally sealed
Protection according DIN 40.050 IP 65

Dimensions

shim

Load Mount H2
H1
previous page

L5 ØD2 (4x)

ØD1
W2 W1

L2
L4 L3
L1
Deflection (mm)
Type L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 W1 W2 H1 H2(min) D1 D2
at Emax
PB-3.75 kg-RH 70 4.9 14 28 23.7 39 27.8 2 3 5.1 5.1 0.46
PB-7.5 kg-RH 70 4.9 14 28 23.7 39 27.8 2.5 3 5.1 5.1 0.40
PB-15 kg-RH 70 4.9 14 28 23.7 39 27.8 4.1 4.5 7.6 5.1 0.27
PB-37.5 kg-RH 76.2 6 15 29.3 27 44.5 30 4.8 5 7.6 6.6 0.36
PB-75 kg-RH 84.4 6.4 15 34 27.7 54.8 30 6.4 5 7.6 6.6 0.35
PB-150 kg-RH 107.3 7.8 22.9 45.9 38.4 69.9 44.5 7.9 6 9.1 8.1 0.56
PB-375 kg-RH 119.4 9.1 25.4 52.6 43.7 76.1 50.8 12.7 6 9.1 9.8 0.68
All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.

Wiring 1 + Input (green)

• The load cell is provided with a 4 conductor ribbon cable and
with AMP #103957-4 connector.
4 + Output (white)
• Cable length: 1.0 m for 3.75/7.5/15 kg,
A32 Rev1 UK 2(2)

1.5 m for 37.5/75/150/375 kg.

2 – Input (black)
A special Junction Box, Type KPB-4 is available.
5 – Output (red)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type PBW Load Cell

Planar Beam
Load Cells
next page

Flintec load cells are designed to meet the most stringent Important Features
accuracy requirements. Certifications have been obtained • Capacity 12.5 to 300 lb.
from Weights & Measures Authorities, worldwide. • High accuracy.
The unique, very low profile Wing Beam load cells offer very low • W&M certified for 3000 intervals
scale profile design while at the same time offering 3000 (PTB: D09-03.03 Rev.1).
divisions scale performance. • Very low profile.
PBW load cells are available in the capacities 12.5 lb to 300 lb • Calibration in mV/V/Ω for C3 classification.
(5.7 to 136 kg) and available in the Accuracy Classifications GP Option
and C3 according to OIML R 60.
• Loading hole M5.
The Flintec calibration technique (in mV/V/Ω) for the C3
classification eliminates time consuming corner calibration in
multiple load cell systems.
A105 Rev1 UK 1(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh
PBW Specifications
Maximum capacity (Emax) lb 12.5 / 18,75 / 25 / 37.5 / 50 / 100 / 200 / 300
Metric equivalent (1 lb=0.45359 kg) kg 5.7 / 8.5 / 11.3 / 17 / 22.7 / 45.4 / 91 / 136
Rated Output (Cn) mV/V 1 ± 10% 0.9 ± 0.1%
Accuracy class according to OIML R 60 (GP) C3
Calibration in mV/V/Ω %Cn n.a. ≤ ± 0.05
Maximum number of verification intervals (nmax) n.a. 3000
Minimum load cell verification interval (vmin) n.a. Emax /7500

Planar Beam
Combined error %Cn ≤ ± 0.040 ≤ ± 0.020

Load Cells
Creep error (30 minutes) / DR %Cn ≤ ± 0.060 ≤ ± 0.016
Temperature effect on minimum dead load output %Cn/°C ≤ ± 0.0040 ≤ ± 0.0018
Temperature effect on sensitivity %/°C ≤ ± 0.0020 ≤ ± 0.0011
Excitation voltage V 5...15
Zero balance %Cn ≤±5
Input resistance Ω 1180 ± 50
Output resistance Ω 1000 ± 10
Insulation resistance (100 V DC) MΩ ≥ 5000
Compensated temperature range °C –10...+40
Operating temperature range °C –10...+65
Safe load limit (Elim) %Emax 300
Ultimate load %Emax 400
Safe side load %Emax 200
Load cell material aluminium
Sealing environmentally sealed
Protection according DIN 40.050 IP 65

Dimensions
63.5
53
Type H1 H2 ØD
previous page PBW-12.5 lb 2.5 -- --
PBW-18.75 lb 2.5 -- --
PBW-25 lb 3.2 -- --
PBW-37.5 lb 4 -- --
PBW-50 lb 4 -- --
PBW-100 lb 6.4 -- -- 63.5
PBW-200 lb 8 3.2 7.4
PBW-300 lb 9.7 3.2 7.4
* Optionally with M5 loading hole

D H2

H1

Ø4.2* Ø4.2 (2x)

All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.

Wiring 1 + Input (green)

• The load cell is provided with a 4 conductor ribbon cable and
with AMP #103957-4 connector.
4 + Output (white)
• Cable length: 1.0 m for 12.5...50 lb,
A105 Rev1 UK 2(2)

1.5 m for 100...300 lb.

2 – Input (black)
A special Junction Box, Type KPB-4 is available.
5 – Output (red)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type ZLB Load Cell

Planar Beam
Load Cells
next page

IP 67
APPROVED

Detail front end with loading arrow

Flintec load cells are designed to meet the most stringent Important Features
accuracy requirements. Certifications have been obtained • Capacities: 20 kg to 200 kg.
from Weights & Measures Authorities, worldwide. • High accuracy.
ZLB load cells are available in the capacities 20 kg to 200 kg • Protection IP 67.
and include Accuracy Classifications GP, C1 and C3 according • Low profile.
to OIML R 60.
• High input resistance: 1100 Ω.
They offer aluminium construction with industrial potting, • W&M certified for 3000 intervals
making them suitable for use in tough industrial environments. (PTB: D09-02.13).
It allows very low profile platform design and offers advantages • Calibration in mV/V/Ω.
in all kinds of weighing applications. • Factory Mutual approved.
The Flintec calibration technique (in mV/V/Ω) eliminates time Option
consuming corner calibration in multiple load cell systems. • Explosion protection zone 0, 1, 2 and
The ZLB is available for use in hazardous areas zone 0, 1, 2 20, 21, 22 ATEX.
(gas) and 20, 21, 22 (dust) according to EEx ia IIC T6...T4 Mounting parts
T150°C ATEX.
A51 Rev1 UK 1(2)

• Load mount (See page 34).

• Spacer plate.

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

ZLB Specifications
Maximum capacity (Emax) kg 20 / 50 / 100 / 200
Rated Output (Cn) mV/V 2 ± 0.1%
Calibration in mV/V/Ω %Cn ≤ ± 0.05
Accuracy class according to OIML R 60 (GP) C1 C3
Maximum number of verification intervals (nmax) n.a. 1000 3000
Minimum load cell verification interval (vmin) n.a. Emax /5000 Emax /10 000
Combined error %Cn ≤ ± 0.040 ≤ ± 0.030 ≤ ± 0.020

Planar Beam
Load Cells
Creep error (30 minutes) / DR %Cn ≤ ± 0.060 ≤ ± 0.049 ≤ ± 0.016
Temperature effect on minimum dead load output %Cn/°C ≤ ± 0.0040 ≤ ± 0.0028 ≤ ± 0.0012
Temperature effect on sensitivity %/°C ≤ ± 0.0020 ≤ ± 0.0016 ≤ ± 0.0011
Excitation voltage V 5...15
Zero balance %Cn ≤±5
Input resistance Ω 1180 ± 50
Output resistance Ω 1000 ± 2
Insulation resistance (100 V DC) MΩ ≥ 5000
Compensated temperature range °C –10...+40
Operating temperature range °C –20...+65
Safe load limit (Elim) %Emax 200
Ultimate load %Emax 300
Safe side load %Emax 100
Load cell material aluminium
Sealing potting
Protection according DIN 40.050 IP 67

Dimensions

136.8
26.2 82 18 (holes ”X”)

previous page
44.5

50 (holes ”Y”)

Ø8.2 Ø8.2 (3x)

Type H Mounting Torque *
bolts
ZLB-20 kg 9.5 M8 8.8 25 Nm H
ZLB-50/100 kg 12.7 M8 8.8 25 Nm
ZLB-200 kg 15.9 M8 8.8 25 Nm
* Torque values assume oiled threads. 40
edge of long mounting surface edge of short mounting surface
80
All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.

Note:
• It is recommended to use mounting holes ”Y" on an 80 mm mounting surface.
Mounting holes “X” can be used on a short (40 mm) mounting surface. If so, a steel spacer (80 mm long
and 10 mm thick) is required for the 200 kg load cell.

Wiring
+ Input (green)
• The load cell is provided with a shielded,
4 conductor cable (AWG 24). Cable jacket polyurethane.
+ Output (white)
• Cable length: 3 m.
A51 Rev1 UK 2(2)

• Cable diameter: 5 mm.

– Input (black)
• The shield is floating (On request the shield can be connected
– Output (red)
to the load cell body).
Shield (yellow)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Load Mounts for Planar Beam Load Cells

Material: Natural rubber

Planar Beam
Load Cells
with steel, zinc plated.

Load Mount for PB Load Cell ØD

G
ØD x H G L S
3.75 kg 10 x 15 M4 10 4
7.5 kg 10 x 15 M4 10 4 L
15 kg 15 x 15 M4 13 4
37.5 kg 20 x 15 M6 15 6
75 kg 20 x 15 M6 15 6 H
150 kg 30 x 15 M8 20 6 S
375 kg 40 x 15 M8 23 8
G

Load Mount for ZLB Load Cell ØD

G
ØD x H G L
20 kg 30 x 15 M8 15
L
50 kg 30 x 15 M8 20
100 kg 30 x 15 M8 20
200 kg 30 x 15 M8 27
H

L
B75 Rev1 UK Load Mounts

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

summary

Beam Type Load Cells

Load Cell Type SLB SB14 SB4 SB5 SB6 SB8** BK2 SB2
OIML / NTEP Yes/Yes Yes/Yes Yes/Yes Yes/Yes Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No
EEx (ATEX) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Material stainless steel tool steel
Hermetic sealing No Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes
Protection IP 67 IP 68 IP 68 IP 68 IP 68 IP 68 IP 67 IP 68
Maximum Capacity *
kg N lb
10 l
20 l
20.4 200 l
50 l
51 500 l

Beam Type
Load Cells
91 200 l
100 l
102 1000 l
200 l l
204 2000 l
227 500 l l
454 1000 l l
500 l l
510 5000 l l
1000 l
1020 10000 l l
next page 1134 2500 l l
2000 l l
2039 20000 l l
2268 5000 l l
4536 10000 l
5099 50000 l l
10197 100000 l l
20412 45000 l
34020 75000 l
45360 100000 l

* The load cells are calibrated in kg, N or lb depending on load cell type (bold print).
** Available first quarter 2005

data sheet data sheet data sheet data sheet

SLB SB14 SB4 SB5

price list price list price list price list

data sheet data sheet data sheet data sheet

SB6 SB8 BK2 SB2

price list price list price list price list

Characteristics of Beam Type Load Cells / Application Parts See next page

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

Characteristics of Beam Type Load Cells

Single ended Beam Type Load Cells in combination with application related mechanical application parts are used
in various standard scale applications of the weighing industry.
The Flintec range covers nominal capacities from 10 kg to 45 t. It utilizes the benefits of a blind hole for the load
introduction in most types of load cells. A special loading pin in the blind hole takes care of a centered load
introduction on the neutral axis of the load cell. This guarantees best weighing results.

Other special features are:

• Calibration for the use of multiple load cells in a scale (corner accuracy)
• Simple overload, and lift off protection solutions
• Insensitive against damage through horizontal forces up to nominal load
• Large variety of application parts for individual solutions

Beam Type
Load Cells
Typical Applications
Industrial platform scales from simple pallet weighers to heavy duty scales in steel works, hopper scales, mixer
scales as well as hybrid systems with one load cell and lever work.

Mechanical Application Parts

Type SLB / SB14 SB4/5 SB6 BK2 SB2
52-00 * Base Plate l l l
52-02 * Rubber Foot l l
52-10 * Height Adjustable Foot l l l
Fixation Plates for Feet 52-02/10/15 l l l l
52-05 * Rubber Element with Flange l l l
52-08 Rocker Pin (stainless steel) l l
52-13 * Sliding System l l l
previous page
56-01 Dummy Support l l
52-31 Tension Adapter l l l
52-15 Height Adjustable Foot (stainless steel) l
52-01HD Sliding System l
* Optionally available in stainless steel.

data sheet data sheet data sheet data sheet

52-00 52-02 52-10 52-05

price list price list price list price list

data sheet data sheet data sheet data sheet

52-08 52-13 56-01 52-31

price list price list price list price list

data sheet data sheet data sheet

52-15 52-01HD Fixation Plates
for 52-02/10/15

Product Catalogue 05

price list price list price list

 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type SLB Load Cell

Beam Type
Load Cells
next page

IP 67
APPROVED

Flintec load cells are designed to meet the most stringent Important Features
accuracy requirements. Certifications have been obtained • Capacities: 200 lb to 5000 lb.
from Weights & Measures Authorities, worldwide. • High accuracy.
SLB load cells ares available in the capacities 200 lb to 5000 lb • Stainless steel construction.
(91 kg to 2268 kg) and include Accuracy Classifications GP, C1 • Protection IP 67.
and C3 according to OIML R 60; NTEP nmax=7500.
• Low profile.
They offer stainless steel construction and improved potting, • High input resistance: 1100 Ω.
making them suitable for use in tough industrial environments.
• W&M certified for 3000 intervals
The unique “blind” loading hole combined with the available (PTB: D09-97.01 Rev. 1).
Flintec loading hardware provides an excellent price- • Unique “blind” loading hole.
performance ratio.
• Calibration in mV/V/Ω.
It allows very low profile platform design and offers advantages
in all kinds of weighing applications. • Complete range of loading hardware
available.
A version with metric or unified threaded loading hole is
• Factory Mutual approved.
available as well.
Option
The Flintec calibration technique (in mV/V/Ω) eliminates time
• Explosion protection zone 0, 1, 2 and
consuming corner calibration in multiple load cell systems.
20, 21, 22 ATEX.
The SLB is available for use in hazardous areas zone 0, 1, 2 Mounting parts
(gas) and 20, 21, 22 (dust) according to EEx ia IIC T6...T4
• Spacer plate.
A24 Rev1 UK 1(2)

T150°C ATEX.

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

SLB Specifications
Maximum capacity (Emax) lb 200 / 500 / 1000 / 2500 / 5000
Metric equivalents (1 lb=0.45359 kg) kg 91 / 227 / 454 / 1134 / 2268
Rated Output (Cn) mV/V 2 ± 0.1%
Calibration in mV/V/Ω (A...I classified) %Cn ≤ ± 0.05 (≤ ± 0.005)
Accuracy class according to OIML R 60 (GP) C3
Maximum number of verification intervals (nmax) n.a. 3000
Minimum load cell verification interva (vmin) n.a. Emax /11500
Combined error %Cn ≤ ± 0.040 ≤ ± 0.020
Creep error (30 minutes) / DR %Cn ≤ ± 0.060 ≤ ± 0.016
Temperature effect on minimum dead load output %Cn/°C ≤ ± 0.0040 ≤ ± 0.0011
Temperature effect on sensitivity %/°C ≤ ± 0.0020 ≤ ± 0.0011
Excitation voltage V 5...15
Zero balance %Cn ≤±5
Input resistance Ω 1100 ± 50
Ω

Beam Type
Load Cells
Output resistance 1000 ± 2
Insulation resistance (100 V DC) MΩ ≥ 5000
Compensated temperature range °C –10...+40
Operating temperature range °C –20...+65
Safe load limit (Elim) %Emax 200
Ultimate load %Emax 300
Safe side load %Emax 100
Load cell material stainless steel 17-4 PH (1.4548)
Sealing potted
Protection according DIN 40.050 IP 67

Dimensions
136.4 19
12.7 76.2 25.4
A Ø4 Ø13 (2x) Ø18

previous page
15
4
30.1
A-A
(SLB-xx lb--BH-Cx)
A 61.5 30.1
edge of mounting plate 17.3

B Ø13.5

15

B-B
(SLB-xx lb-CM-Cx)
B M12 *
All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.
Mounting bolts for 200 lb to 2500 lb: M12 8.8 / torque 90 Nm; for 5000 lb: M12 10.9 / torque 120 Nm. Torque values assume oiled threads.
* Unified thread 1/2-20 UNF is available (type designation SLB-xx lb-Cx-CU).

Wiring
+ Input (green)
• The load cell is provided with a shielded,
4 conductor cable (AWG 24). Cable jacket polyurethane.
+ Output (white)
• Cable length: 3 m.
A24 Rev1 UK 2(2)

• Cable diameter: 5 mm.

– Input (black)
• The shield is floating (On request the shield can be connected
– Output (red)
to the load cell body).
Shield (yellow)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type SB14 Load Cell

Beam Type
Load Cells
next page

IP 68
APPROVED

Flintec load cells are designed to meet the most stringent Important Features
accuracy requirements. Certifications have been obtained • Capacities: 500 lb to 10000 lb.
from Weights & Measures Authorities, worldwide. • High accuracy.
SB14 load cells are available in the capacities 500 lb to 10000 lb • Total stainless steel construction.
(227 kg to 4536 kg) and include Accuracy Classifications GP, • Complete hermetic sealing.
C3 and C3 MI 6 according to OIML R 60; NTEP nmax=5000.
• Protection IP 68.
They offer total stainless steel construction and complete • Low profile.
hermetic sealing, making them suitable for use in the toughest
• High input resistance: 1100 Ω.
industrial environments.
• W&M certified for 3000 intervals
The unique “blind” loading hole combined with the available (PTB: D09-97.15 Rev. 2).
Flintec loading hardware provides an excellent price-
• Unique “blind” loading hole.
performance ratio.
It allows very low profile platform design and offers advantages • Calibration in mV/V/Ω.
in all kinds of weighing applications. • Easy cable replacement.
A version with metric or unified threaded loading hole is • Complete range of loading hardware
available as well. available.
• Factory Mutual approved.
The Flintec calibration technique (in mV/V/Ω) eliminates time
consuming corner calibration in multiple load cell systems. Option
• Explosion protection zone 0, 1, 2 and
The SB14 is available for use in hazardous areas zone 0, 1, 2
20, 21, 22 ATEX.
A31 Rev2 UK 1(2)

(gas) and 20, 21, 22 (dust) according to EEx ia IIC T6...T4

T130°C ATEX. • C3 and C3 MI 6 with Y=23000.

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh
SB14 Specifications
Maximum capacity (Emax ) lb 500 / 1000 / 2500 / 5000 / 10000 500 / 1000 / 2500
Metric equivalents (1 lb=0.45359 kg) kg 227 / 454 / 1134 / 2268 / 4536 227 / 454 / 1134
Rated Output (Cn) mV/V 2 ± 0.1%
Calibration in mV/V/Ω (A...I classified) %Cn ≤± 0.05 (≤± 0.005)
Accuracy class according to OIML R 60 (GP) C3 C3 MI 6
Maximum number of verification intervals (nmax) n.a. 3000 3000
Minimum load cell verification interval (vmin ) n.a. Emax /11 500
Temperature effect on minimum dead load output %Cn/°C ≤ ± 0.0040 ≤ ± 0.0011 ≤ ± 0.0011
Option (500/ Min.load cell verification interval (vmin ) n.a. Emax /23000
1000/2500 lb) Temp. effect on min. dead load output %Cn/°C n.a. ≤ ± 0.0006 ≤ ± 0.0006
Combined error %Cn ≤ ± 0.040 ≤ ± 0.020 ≤ ± 0.020
Creep error (30 minutes) / DR %Cn ≤ ± 0.060 ≤ ± 0.016 ≤ ± 0.008
Temperature effect on sensitivity %/°C ≤ ± 0.0020 ≤ ± 0.0011 ≤ ± 0.0011
Excitation voltage V 5...15
Zero balance %Cn ≤±5

Beam Type
Load Cells
Input resistance Ω 1100 ± 50
Output resistance Ω 1000 ± 2
Insulation resistance (100 V DC) MΩ ≥ 5000
Compensated temperature range °C –10...+40
Operating temperature range °C –40...+80
Safe load limit (Elim) %Emax 200
Ultimate load %Emax 300
Safe side load %Emax 100
Load cell material stainless steel 17-4 PH (1.4548)
Sealing complete hermetic sealing; cable entry sealed by glass to metal header
Protection according DIN 40.050 IP 68

Dimensions
L1 41
L2 L3 L4
A Ø4 ØD1
previous page H4

H3
H1 H2 A-A
(SB14-xx lb--BH-Cx)

A ØD2 (2x) W
L5

B ØD3

H5
B-B
(SB14-xx lb-CM/HCM-Cx)

B D4 **

Mounting
Type L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 W D1 D2 D3 D4 Torque *
bolts
SB14-500 lb/1000 lb 133.4 12.7 76.2 25.4 59.9 31 28.8 15 4 15 30 18 13 13.5 M12 M12 8.8 90 Nm
SB14-2500 lb 133.4 12.7 76.2 25.4 59.9 31 30.5 15 4 15 30 18 13 13.5 M12 M12 8.8 90 Nm
SB14-5000 lb 133.4 12.7 76.2 25.4 59.9 31 30.5 15 4 15 30 18 13 13.5 M12 M12 10.9 120 Nm
SB14-10000 lb 177.8 19.1 95.3 38.1 92.7 43.6 38.1 20.5 8 20.1 43 25 21 30.2 M20 M20 8.8 400 Nm
All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.
* Torque values assume oiled threads.
** Unified thread 1/2-20 UNF (500...5000 lb) and 3/4-16 UNF (10000 lb) is available. Type designation SB14-xx-CU.

Wiring
+ Input (green)
• The load cell is provided with a shielded,
4 conductor cable (AWG 24)). Cable jacket polyurethane.
+ Output (white)
• Cable length: 3 m for SB14-500 lb to 5000 lb,
A31 Rev2 UK 2(2)

4.5 m for SB14-10000 lb.

• Cable diameter: 5 mm. – Input (black)
– Output (red)
• The shield is floating (On request the shield can be connected
Shield (yellow)
to the load cell body).
Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type SB4 Load Cell

Beam Type
Load Cells
next page

IP 68
APPROVED

Flintec load cells are designed to meet the most stringent Important Features
accuracy requirements. Certifications have been obtained • Capacities: 5 kN to 100 kN.
from Weights & Measures Authorities, worldwide. • High accuracy.
SB4 load cells are available in the capacities 5 kN to 100 kN • Total stainless steel construction.
(510 kg to 10197 kg) and include Accuracy Classifications GP, • Complete hermetic sealing.
C1, C3, C3 MI 7.5, C4 and C4 MI 7.5 according to OIML R 60;
• Protection IP 68.
NTEP nmax=5000.
• Low profile.
They offer total stainless steel construction and complete
• High input resistance: 1100 Ω.
hermetic sealing, making them suitable for use in the toughest
industrial environments. • W&M certified for 4000 intervals
(PTB: D09-97.02 Rev. 1).
The unique “blind” loading hole combined with the available
• Multi range and multi interval accuracy.
Flintec loading hardware provides an excellent price-
performance ratio. • Unique “blind” loading hole.
It allows very low profile platform design and offers advantages • Calibration in mV/V/Ω.
in all kinds of weighing applications. • Easy cable replacement.
The Flintec calibration technique (in mV/V/Ω) eliminates time • Complete range of loading hardware
consuming corner calibration in multiple load cell systems. available.
The SB4 is available for use in hazardous areas zone 0, 1, 2 • Factory Mutual approved.
(gas) and 20, 21, 22 (dust) according to EEx ia IIC T6...T4 Option
A01 Rev1 UK 1(2)

T130°C ATEX. • Explosion protection zone 0, 1, 2 and

20, 21, 22 ATEX.

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

SB4 Specifications
Maximum capacity (Emax ) kN 5 / 10 / 20 / 50 / 100 5 / 10 / 20 / 50
Metric equivalents (1 N=0.10197 kg) kg 510 / 1020 / 2039 / 5099 / 10197 510 / 1020 / 2039 / 5099
Rated Output (Cn) mV/V 2 ± 0.1%
Calibration in mV/V/Ω (A...I classified) %Cn ≤ ± 0.05 (≤ ± 0.005)
Accuracy class according to OIML R 60 (GP) C1 C3 C3 MI 7.5 C4 C4 MI 7.5
Maximum number of verification intervals (nmax) n.a. 1000 3000 3000 4000 4000
Minimum load cell verification interval (vmin) n.a. Emax /5100 Emax /11000 Emax /11000 Emax /11000 Emax /11000
Combined error %Cn ≤ ± 0.040 ≤ ± 0.030 ≤ ± 0.020 ≤ ± 0.020 ≤ ± 0.018 ≤ ± 0.018
Creep error (30 minutes) / DR %Cn ≤ ± 0.060 ≤ ± 0.049 ≤ ± 0.016 ≤ ± 0.0066 ≤ ± 0.012 ≤ ± 0.0066
Temperature effect on minimum dead load output %Cn/°C ≤ ± 0.0040 ≤ ± 0.0028 ≤ ± 0.0012 ≤ ± 0.0007 ≤ ± 0.0012 ≤ ± 0.0012
Temperature effect on sensitivity %/°C ≤ ± 0.0020 ≤ ± 0.0016 ≤ ± 0.0011 ≤ ± 0.0011 ≤ ± 0.0008 ≤ ± 0.0008
Excitation voltage V 5...15
Zero balance %Cn ≤±5
Input resistance Ω 1100 ± 50
Ω

Beam Type
Load Cells
Output resistance 1000 ± 2
Insulation resistance (100 DC) MΩ ≥ 5000
Compensated temperature range °C –10...+40
Operating temperature range °C –40...+80
Safe load limit (Elim) %Emax 200
Ultimate load %Emax 300
Safe side load %Emax 100
Load cell material stainless steel 17-4 PH (1.4548)
Sealing complete hermetic sealing; cable entry sealed by glass to metal header
Protection according DIN 40.050 IP 68

Dimensions

L1 41
L2 L3 L4 ØD1
30 H4 H5
previous page A Ø4

H1
H3
H2
A
ØD2 (2x) W
L5
A-A

Mounting
Type L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 W D1 D2 Torque *
bolts
SB4-5 kN/10 kN/20 kN 155 15 80 35 76 36 6 21 7 4 30 18 13 M12 8.8 90 Nm
SB4-50 kN 190 21 105 40 93 49 8 28.5 6 8 43 25 21 M20 8.8 400 Nm
SB4-100 kN 245 30 135 50 120 73 12.5 42 10 n.a. 60 30 27 M24 8.8 700 Nm
All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.
* Torque values assume oiled threads.

Wiring
+ Input (green)
• The load cell is provided with a shielded,
4 conductor cable (AWG 24). Cable jacket polyurethane.
+ Output (white)
• Cable length: 3 m for SB4-5 kN/10 kN/20 kN,
A01 Rev1 UK 2(2)

4.5 m for SB4-50 kN/100 kN.

– Input (black)
• Cable diameter: 5 mm.
– Output (red)
• The shield is floating (On request the shield can be connected
Shield (yellow)
to the load cell body).

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type SB5 Load Cell

Beam Type
Load Cells
next page

IP 67
APPROVED

Flintec load cells are designed to meet the most stringent Important Features
accuracy requirements. Certifications have been obtained • Capacities: 5 kN to 100 kN
from Weights & Measures Authorities, worldwide. • High accuracy.
SB5 load cells are available in the capacities 5 kN to 100 kN • Stainless steel construction.
(510 kg to 10197 kg) and include Accuracy Classifications GP, • Protection IP 67.
C1and C3 according to OIML R 60; NTEP nmax=5000.
• Low profile.
They offer stainless steel construction and improved potting, • High input resistance: 1100 Ω.
making them suitable for use in tough industrial environments.
• W&M certified for 3000 intervals
The unique “blind” loading hole combined with the available (PTB: D09-97.03).
Flintec loading hardware provides an excellent price- • Unique “blind” loading hole.
performance ratio.
• Calibration in mV/V/Ω.
It allows very low profile platform design and offers advantages
in all kinds of weighing applications. • Easy cable replacement.
• Complete range of loading hardware
The Flintec calibration technique (in mV/V/Ω) eliminates time
available.
consuming corner calibration in multiple load cell systems.
• Fully compatible with load cell type SB4.
The SB5 is available for use in hazardous areas zone 0, 1, 2
• Factory Mutual approved.
(gas) and 20, 21, 22 (dust) according to EEx ia IIC T6...T4
T150°C ATEX. Option
• Explosion protection zone 0, 1, 2 and
20, 21, 22 ATEX.
A12 Rev1 UK 1(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

SB5 Specifications
Maximum capacity (Emax) kN 5 / 10 / 20 / 50 / 100 5 / 10 / 20 / 50
Metric equivalents (1 N=0.10197 kg) kg 510 / 1020 / 2039 / 5099 / 10197 510 / 1020 / 2039 / 5099
Rated Output (Cn) mV/V 2 ± 0.1%
Calibration in mV/V/Ω (A...I classified) %Cn ≤ ± 0.05 (≤ ± 0.005)
Accuracy class according to OIML R 60 (GP) C1 C3
Maximum number of verification intervals (nmax) n.a. 1000 3000
Minimum load cell verification interval (vmin) n.a. Emax/5100 Emax/10200
Combined error %Cn ≤ ± 0.040 ≤ ± 0.030 ≤ ± 0.020
Creep error (30 minutes) / DR %Cn ≤ ± 0.060 ≤ ± 0.049 ≤ ± 0.016
Temperature effect on minimum dead load output %Cn/°C ≤ ± 0.0040 ≤ ± 0.0028 ≤ ± 0.0012
Temperature effect on sensitivity %/°C ≤ ± 0.0020 ≤ ± 0.0016 ≤ ± 0.0011
Excitation voltage V 5...15
Zero balance %Cn ≤±5
Input resistance Ω 1100 ± 50
Ω

Beam Type
Load Cells
Output resistance 1000 ± 2
Insulation resistance (100 V DC) MΩ ≥ 5000
Compensated temperature range °C –10...+40
Operating temperature range °C –20...+65
Safe load limit (Elim) %Emax 200
Ultimate load %Emax 300
Safe side load %Emax 100
Load cell material stainless steel 17-4 PH (1.4548)
Sealing potted
Protection according DIN 40.050 IP 67

Dimensions

L1 41
L2 L3 L4 ØD1
30 H4 H5
previous page A Ø4

H1
H3
H2
A
ØD2 (2x) W
L5
A-A

Mounting
Type L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 W D1 D2 Torque *
bolts
SB5-5 kN/10 kN/20 kN 155 15 80 35 76 36 6 21 7 4 30 18 13 M12 8.8 90 Nm
SB5-50 kN 190 21 105 40 93 49 8 28.5 6 8 43 25 21 M20 8.8 400 Nm
SB5-100 kN 245 30 135 50 120 73 12.5 42 10 n.a. 60 30 27 M24 8.8 700 Nm
All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.
* Torque values assume oiled threads.

Wiring
+ Input (green)
• The load cell is provided with a shielded,
4 conductor cable (AWG 24). Cable jacket polyurethane.
+ Output (white)
• Cable length: 3 m for SB5-5 kN/10 kN/20 kN,
A12 Rev1 UK 2(2)

4.5 m for SB5-50 kN/100 kN.

• Cable diameter: 5 mm. – Input (black)
– Output (red)
• The shield is floating (On request the shield can be connected
Shield (yellow)
to the load cell body).

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type SB6 Load Cell

Beam Type
Load Cells
next page

IP 68
APPROVED

Flintec load cells are designed to meet the most stringent Important Features
accuracy requirements. Certifications have been obtained • Capacities: 0.2 kN to 2 kN.
from Weights & Measures Authorities, worldwide. • High accuracy.
SB6 load cells are available in the capacities 0.2 kN to 2 kN • Total stainless steel construction.
(20.4 kg to 204 kg) and include Accuracy Classifications GP, • Complete hermetic sealing.
C1, C3 and C4 according to OIML R 60.
• Protection IP 68.
They offer total stainless steel construction and complete • Low profile.
hermetic sealing, making them suitable for use in the toughest
• High input resistance: 1100 Ω.
industrial environments.
• W&M certified for 4000 intervals
The special loading hole combined with the available Flintec (PTB: D09-97.04 Rev. 1).
loading hardware provides an excellent price-performance
• Calibration in mV/V/Ω.
ratio.
It allows very low profile platform design and offers advantages • Easy cable replacement.
in all kinds of weighing applications. • Complete range of loading hardware
available.
The Flintec calibration technique (in mV/V/Ω) eliminates time
consuming corner calibration in multiple load cell systems. • Factory Mutual approved.
Option
The SB6 is available for use in hazardous areas zone 0, 1, 2
(gas) and 20, 21, 22 (dust) according to EEx ia IIC T6...T4 • Explosion protection zone 0, 1, 2 and
T130°C ATEX. 20, 21, 22 ATEX.
• C3 and C4 with Y=20400.
A18 Rev1 UK 1(2)

Mounting parts
• Insert for loading hole.
• Spacer plate.

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

SB6 Specifications
Maximum capacity (Emax) kN 0.2 / 0.5 / 1 / 2 0.2 / 0.5 / 1
Metric equivalents (1 N=0.10197 kg) kg 20.4 / 51 / 102 / 204 20.4 / 51 / 102
Rated Output (Cn) mV/V 2 ± 0.1%
Calibration in mV/V/Ω (A...I classified) %Cn ≤ ± 0.05 (≤ ± 0.005)
Accuracy class according to OIML R 60 (GP) C1 C3 C4
Maximum number of verification intervals (nmax) n.a. 1000 3000 4000
Minimum load cell verification interval (vmin) n.a. Emax /5100 Emax /10200 Emax /10200
Temperature effect on minimum dead load output %Cn/°C ≤ ± 0.0040 ≤ ± 0.0028 ≤ ± 0.0012 ≤ ± 0.0012
Min. load cell verification interval (vmin) n.a. n.a. Emax /20400 Emax /20400
Option
Temp. effect on min. dead load output %Cn/°C n.a. n.a. ≤ ± 0.006 ≤ ± 0.006
Combined error %Cn ≤ ± 0.040 ≤ ± 0.030 ≤ ± 0.020 ≤ ± 0.018
Creep error (30 minutes) / DR %Cn ≤ ± 0.060 ≤ ± 0.049 ≤ ± 0.016 ≤ ± 0.012
Temperature effect on sensitivity %/°C ≤ ± 0.0020 ≤ ± 0.0016 ≤ ± 0.0011 ≤ ± 0.0008
Excitation voltage V 5...15
≤±5

Beam Type
Load Cells
Zero balance %Cn
Input resistance Ω 1100 ± 50
Output resistance Ω 1000 ± 2
Insulation resistance (100 V DC) MΩ ≥ 5000
Compensated temperature range °C –10...+40
Operating temperature range °C –40...+80
Safe load limit (Elim) %Emax 200
Ultimate load %Emax 300
Safe side load %Emax 100
Load cell material stainless steel 17-4 PH (1.4548)
Sealing complete hermetic sealing; cable entry sealed by glass to metal header
Protection according DIN 40.050 IP 68

Dimensions
130 41
10 82 18 Ø16
previous page
3
X A 8

30
20 Ø4 Ø14

X 16
A A-A
Ø8.7 (2x)
max.11 edge of mounting plate Ø8.7
25 52

Capacity X Y
Y 30 200-500 N 12.7 19
1-2 kN 10 22

All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.
Mounting bolts M8 8.8; torque: 25 Nm. Torque value assumes oiled threads.

Wiring
+ Input (green)
• The load cell is provided with a shielded,
4 conductor cable (AWG 24). Cable jacket polyurethane.
+ Output (white)
• Cable length: 3 m.
A18 Rev1 UK 2(2)

• Cable diameter: 5 mm.

– Input (black)
• The shield is floating (On request the shield can be connected
– Output (red)
to the load cell body).
Shield (yellow)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type SB8 Load Cell

Beam Type
Load Cells
next page

IP 67
APPROVED

Flintec load cells are designed to meet the most stringent Important Features
accuracy requirements. Certifications have been obtained • Capacities: 10 kg to 500 kg.
from Weights & Measures Authorities, worldwide. • High accuracy.
SB8 load cells are available in the capacities 10 kg to 500 kg • Total stainless steel construction.
and include Accuracy Classifications GP, C1 and C3 according • Protection IP 67.
to OIML R 60.
• Low profile.
The Flintec calibration technique (in mV/V/Ω) eliminates time • W&M certified for 3000 intervals
consuming corner calibration in multiple load cell systems. (in preparation).
The SB8 is available for use in hazardous areas zone 0, 1, 2 • Calibration in mV/V/Ω.
(gas) and 20, 21, 22 (dust) according to EEx ia IIC T6...T4 • Complete range of loading hardware
T130°C ATEX. available.
• Factory Mutual approved.
Option
• Explosion protection zone 0, 1, 2 and
20, 21, 22 ATEX.
A103 Rev2 UK 1(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

SB8 Specifications
Maximum capacity (Emax) kg 10 / 20 / 50 / 100 / 200 / 500
Rated Output (Cn) mV/V 2 ± 0.1%
Calibration in mV/V/Ω (A...I classified) %Cn ≤ ± 0.05 (≤ ± 0.005)
Accuracy class according to OIML R 60 (GP) C1 C3
Maximum number of verification intervals (nmax) n.a. 1000 3000
Minimum load cell verification interval (vmin) n.a. Emax /5000 Emax /10000
Combined error %Cn ≤ ± 0.040 ≤ ± 0.030 ≤ ± 0.020
Creep error (30 minutes) / DR %Cn ≤ ± 0.060 ≤ ± 0.049 ≤ ± 0.016
Temperature effect on minimum dead load output %Cn/°C ≤ ± 0.0040 ≤ ± 0.0028 ≤ ± 0.0014
Temperature effect on sensitivity %/°C ≤ ± 0.0020 ≤ ± 0.0016 ≤ ± 0.0011
Excitation voltage V 5...15
Zero balance %Cn ≤±5
Input resistance Ω 380 ± 10
Output resistance Ω 350 ± 3
Insulation resistance (100 V DC) MΩ ≥ 5000
Compensated temperature range °C –10...+40

Beam Type
Load Cells
Operating temperature range °C –40...+80
Safe load limit (Elim) %Emax 200
Ultimate load %Emax 300
Safe side load %Emax 100
Load cell material stainless steel 17-4 PH (1.4548)
Protection according DIN 40.050 IP 67

Dimensions

120

45.5 20.5

previous page
20 20

ØB(2x) 18 82 10

ØA

23
Ø41 Ø32 Ø23

Type A B Mounting bolts Torque*

10...200 kg 8.2 8.2 M8 8.8 25 Nm
500 kg 10.5 10.5 M10 8.8 50 Nm
* Torque value assumes oiled thread.
All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.

Wiring
+ Input (green)
• The load cell is provided with a shielded, + Sense (blue)
6 conductor cable (AWG 26).
+ Output (white)
• Cable length: 3 m.
A103 Rev2 UK 2(2)

• Cable diameter: 5.8 mm. – Sense (brown)

– Input (black)
• The shield is connected to the load cell body.
– Output (red)
Shield (yellow)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type 52-00 Base Plate

Flintec load cell supports are designed to prevent unwanted Important Features
forces from affecting load cell performance. • Capacity range: 20 kg to 10 000 kg.
The Type 52-00 is a base plate assembly, used to support the • Very easy to install.
SB4, SB5, SB6, SB14 and SLB load cells. The assembly
Options
includes base plate and load cell mounting bolts.
• Lateral load cell locking system for SB4
For SLB and SB14 load cells the base plate is supplied with a and SB5.
lateral load cell locking system for reacting side loads.
• Overload protection system.
Optionally avilable for SB4 and SB5 load cells.
It can also be provided with an overload stop, to protect the
load cell.

Beam Type
Load Cells
Material: steel, zinc plated; alternatively stainless steel.

Dimensions
next page

BASE PLATE FOR SB4/SB5/SB6 BASE PLATE FOR SB14/SLB

Section A-A Section B-B

H1 H1 H3 H4
H2 H2

ØD for mounting bolts (4x)

L1 L1
L2 L3 L2 L3

= =

W1 W2 W1 W2
M8 M8
(2x)
A (2x)
B

= =
A B

Mounting
Load Cell Type Capacity in kg L1 L2 L3 H1 H2 H3 H4 W1 W2 ÆD
bolts
SB6-200 N/500 N/1 kN/2 kN* 20.4/51/102/204 150 8 44 15 8 n.a. n.a. 60 44 7 M6
SB4/SB5-5 kN/10 kN/20 kN 510/1020/2039 180 11 58 30 21 n.a. n.a. 80 58 9 M8
SB4/SB5-50 kN 5099 220 12 76 40 29 n.a. n.a. 100 76 11 M10
SB4/SB5-100 kN 10197 275 15 90 60 47 n.a. n.a. 120 90 14.5 M12
SB14-500 lb/1 klb/2.5 klb/5 klb 227/454/1134/2268
SLB-200 lb/500 lb/ 91/227/ 164 11 58 29 20 35 40 80 58 9 M8
1 klb/2.5 klb/5 klb 454/1134/2268
* To be mounted including spacer (height 15 mm).
All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.
B29 Rev1 UK 1(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

Options

H1
H2

pins in base plate (4x)

L1
L4 L5
L2 L3

Beam Type
Load Cells
W1 W2

Load cell locking system for SB4/SB5 (option)

special bolt+shims+v-ring

DETAIL FOR SB6

previous page

gap x

gap x

additional threaded hole in base plate

Overload protection system (option)

Load cell deflection

Load cell Deflection Gap “x” Load cell Deflection Gap “x” Load cell Deflection Gap x Load cell Deflection Gap “x”
SB6 * setting** SB4/SB5 * setting** SLB * setting** SB14 * setting**
200 N 0.21 mm 0.25 mm 5 kN 0.21 mm 0.25 mm 200 lb 0.27 mm 0.35 mm 500 lb 0.21 mm 0.30 mm
500 N 0,30 mm 0.40 mm 10 kN 0.29 mm 0.35 mm 500 lb 0.24 mm 0.30 mm 1 klb 0.24 mm 0.30 mm
1 kN 0.26 mm 0.35 mm 20 kN 0.49 mm 0.60 mm 1 klb 0.25 mm 0.30 mm 2.5 klb 0.32 mm 0.40 mm
2 kN 0.36 mm 0.45 mm 50 kN 0.52 mm 0.65 mm 2.5 klb 0.33 mm 0.40 mm 5 klb 0.47 mm 0.60 mm
100 kN 0.74 mm 0.95 mm 5 klb 0.56 mm 0.70 mm 10 klb
Remarks:
* Deflection is defined as the sum of load cell deflection and base plate bending.
** Settings for utilisation to Maximum Capacity of the load cell. If utilisation of load cell is lower, the setting value could be reduced in proportion
to the load.
B29 Rev1 UK 2(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type 52-02 Rubber Foot

100 kg...10 t

Beam Type
Load Cells
next page

Rubber foot 52-02 and SB4 load cell

Flintec load cell supports are designed to prevent unwanted Important Features
forces from affecting load cell performance. • Blind hole load introduction.
The Type 52-02 is a self aligning rubber foot, combining • Capacity range: 100 kg to 10000 kg.
excellent load introduction with low profile design.
• Low profile.
A special low profile foot is available. • Height adjustable with shims.
The height is adjustable by shims. • Very easy to install.
Especially designed for the SB4, SB5, SB14 and SLB load cells. • Especially designed for platform scales.
Material: steel, zinc plated; alternatively stainless steel. • W&M certified.
• A special low profile foot is available.
Accessory
• Fixation plate (see Miscellaneous).

Examples
B02 Rev1 UK 1(2)

Tank weighing system with 3 load cells

Platform scale with 4 load cells
(recommended base plate 52-00 included)
Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

Dimensions

o-ring

H1

H3 retaining clip
receptor for hook or
ØD1 other hardware ØD2
L
0.05 (load cell mounting surface)

OPTION

Beam Type
Load Cells
shim installed for height adjustment
connection hook installed for ramps
Load Cell Type Capacity in kg L H1 H2 H3 D1 D2
SB4/SB5-5 kN/10 kN/20 kN 510/1020/2039 180 65 58 16 80 24.5
SB4/SB5-50 kN 5099 219 90 n.a. 18 100 34.5
SB4/SB5-100 kN** 10179 278 109 n.a. 26 125 44
SB14-500 lb/1 klb 227/454 164 60 53 16 80 24.5
SB14-2.5 klb/5 klb 1134/2268 164 62* 55* 16 80 24.5
SLB-200 lb/500 lb 91/227 154 61* 54* 16 60 24.5
SLB-1 klb/2.5 klb/5 klb 454/1134/2268 164 61* 54* 16 80 24.5
previous page * Including spacer.
** A special retaining clip is available.
All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.
CAD files for customer’s own application drawings are available on request.

Details Type SLB Load Cell

2 (spacer)

H1

ØD1
L

Low Profile Foot

H2
B02 Rev1 UK 2(2)

EXAMPLE LOW PROFILE FOOT

(no receptor for hook or other hardware)
ØD1
L

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type 52-10 Height Adjustable Rubber Foot

20 kg...2.5 t

Beam Type
Load Cells
next page

Height adjustable rubber foot 52-10 and SB4 load cell

Flintec load cell supports are designed to prevent unwanted Important Features
forces from affecting load cell performance. • Blind hole load introduction.
The Type 52-10 is an heigth adjustable, self aligning rubber • Capacity range: 20 kg to 2 500 kg.
foot; combining excellent load introduction with low profile
• Low profile.
design. Height adjustable by rotation of the foot.
• Height adjustable by rotation.
Especially designed for the SB4, SB5, SB6, SB14 and SLB load
• Very easy to install.
cells.
• Especially designed for platform scales.
Material: steel, zinc plated; alternatively stainless steel.
• W&M certified.
Accessory
• Fixation plate (see Miscellaneous).

Examples
B21 Rev1 UK 1(2)

Platform scale with 4 load cells Tank weighing system with 3 load cells
(recommended base plate 52-00 included)
Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

Dimensions
SB4 / SB5 / SB14

o-ring
H
locking screw
receptor for hook
or other hardware

ØD
0.05 (load cell mounting surface)
L

OPTION

Beam Type
Load Cells
connection hook
for ramps

retaining clip

Load Cell Type Capacity in kg L H D

SB4/SB5-5 kN/10 kN/20 kN 510/1020/2039 180 63...71 80
SB6-200 N/500 N1 kN/2 kN 20.4/51/102/204 150 65...71* 60
SB14-500 lb/1 klb 227/454 164 58...66 80
SB14-2.5 klb/5 klb 1134/2268 164 60...68* 80
SLB-200 lb/500 lb 91/227 154 57...63* 60
SLB-1 klb/2.5 klb/5 klb 454/1134/2268 164 59...67* 80
* Including spacer.
previous page
All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.
CAD files for customer’s own application drawings are available on request.

Details Type SLB Load Cell

1 klb...5 klb 200 lb/500 lb
2 (spacer)

H H

ØD ØD
L

Details Type SB6 Load Cell

load button

15 (spacer)

H
B21 Rev1 UK 2(2)

ØD
L

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Fixation Plates for Feet 52-02/10/15

Material: black polypropylen
• Symmetrical for foot with diameter Ø60.
• Symmetrical for foot with diameter Ø80.
• Asymmetrical for foot with diameter Ø60.
• Asymmetrical for foot with diameter Ø80.
• Asymmetrical for foot with diameter Ø100.

Beam Type
Load Cells
Dimensions Fixation Plates

T
Ø14
5
ØE (3x)
T

Ø7 for M6 (4x) C

ØD

A B

ØD C
A B

B B
A A

Symetrical fixation plate Asymmetrical fixation plate

A B C D E T
Symmetrical for foot with diameter Ø60 90 70 n.a. 62 n.a. 10
Symmetrical for foot with diameter Ø80 110 90 n.a. 83 n.a. 10
Asymmetrical for foot with diameter Ø60 140 115 45 62 10 for M8 10
Asymmetrical for foot with diameter Ø80 160 135 55 83 10 for M8 10
Asymmetrical for foot with diameter Ø100 160 155 65 104 12 for M10 15
B76 Rev1 UK Fixation Plate

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type 52-05 Rubber Element with Flange

20 kg...5 t

Beam Type
Load Cells
next page

Rubber element with flange 52-05 and SB4 load cell combined with base plate 52-00

Flintec load cell supports are designed to prevent unwanted Important Features
forces from affecting load cell performance. • Blind hole load introduction.
The Type 52-05 is a self aligning rubber element with flange, • Capacity range: 20 kg to 5 000 kg.
combining excellent load introduction with low profile design.
• High lateral compliance.
Especially designed for the SB4, SB5, SB6, SB14 and SLB load • Very easy to install.
cells.
• Especially designed for hopper, mixer and
Material: steel, zinc plated; alternatively stainless steel. platform scales.
• W&M certified.
Accessory
• Welding plate.

Examples
B11 Rev1 UK 1(2)

Platform or hopper scale with 4 load cells Tank weighing system with 3 load cells

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

Dimensions

Welding plate (accessory)

H2

0.05 (load cell mounting surface)

H1 gasket
o-ring

L Note:
W1
W2 If lateral forces exceed the RF value,
ØD for mounting bolts (4x) use bumper stops.
Gap approx. 2...3 mm.

Beam Type
Load Cells
W1 W2

Mounting Smax**
Load Cell Type Capacity in kg L H1 H2 W1 W2 RF***
bolts D
SB4/SB5-5 kN/10 kN/20 kN 510/1020/2039 180 63 12 80 58 M8 5 mm 1600 N
SB4/SB5-50 kN 5099 219 78 12 100 76 M10 5 mm 5000 N
SB6-200 N/500 N/1 kN/2 kN 20.4/51/102/204 150 65* 6 60 44 M6 6 mm 700 N
SB14-500 lb 227 154 54 6 60 44 M6 6 mm 700 N
SB14-1 klb/2.5 klb/5 klb 454/1134/2268 164 60* 12 80 58 M8 5 mm 1600 N
SLB-200 lb/500 lb 91/227 154 55* 6 60 44 M6 6 mm 700 N
previous page SLB-1 klb/2.5 klb/5 klb 454/1134/2268 164 59* 12 80 58 M8 5 mm 1600 N
* Including spacer.
** Smax =maximum lateral displacement of load introduction.
*** RF =restoring force at Smax.
All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.
CAD files for customer’s own application drawings are available on request.

Details Type SLB Load Cell

L
W1

H1

2 (spacer)

Details Type SB6 Load Cell

L
W1

H1
B11 Rev1 UK 2(2)

15 (spacer)

load button

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type 52-08 Rocker Pin

100 kg...10 t

Beam Type
Load Cells
next page

Rocker pin 52-08 and SB4 load cell combined with base plate 52-00

Flintec load cell supports are designed to prevent unwanted Important Features
forces from affecting load cell performance. • Blind hole load introduction.
The Type 52-08 is a self aligning rocker pin assembly; • Capacity range: 100 kg to 10 000 kg.
combining excellent load introduction with low profile design.
• Excellent reproducability of load
Especially designed for the SB4, SB5, SB14 and SLB load cells. application.
An Installation Guide Pin is available for easy alignment. • Low profile.
Material: stainless steel. • Very easy to install.
• W&M certified.
Accessory
• Installation guide pin.

Examples

foundation

= bumper stop
Bumpers must be
arranged between
load carrier and
B20 Rev1 UK 1(2)

foundation.

Platform or hopper scale with 4 load cells Bumper stop detail

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

Dimensions

L2

mounting bolts D2 (2x) DETAIL INSTALLATION GUIDE PIN

Installation guide pin

load carrier
centers loading cup to
H2
load cell loading hole.
gasket 0.05 (load cell mounting surface)
o-ring

H1

L1

Beam Type
Load Cells
Note:
Bumper stops are required.
Gap approx. 2...3 mm.
ØD1 A special part is available
with integrated bumper stops.

Mounting
Load Cell Type Capacity in kg L1 L2 H1 H2 D1
bolts D2
SB4/SB5-5 kN/10 kN/20 kN 510/1020/2039 165 34 70 16 50 M8
SB4/SB5-50 kN 5099 199 44 90 20 60 M10
SB4/SB5-100 kN 10197 250 50 115 20 68 M10
SB14-500 lb/1 klb 227/454 149 34 65 16 50 M8
SB14-2.5 klb/5 klb 1134/2268 149 34 67* 16 50 M8
SLB-200 lb/500 lb/1 klb/2.5 klb/5 klb 91/227/454/1134/2268 149 34 66* 16 50 M8
previous page * Including spacer
Restoring force: approx. 3% of actual load / mm lateral displacement of load introduction.
All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.
CAD files for customer’s own application drawings are available on request.

Details Type SLB Load Cell

L1

H1

2 (spacer)
B20 Rev1 UK 2(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type 52-13 Sliding System

20 kg...10 t

Beam Type
Load Cells
next page 2-Directional Bumper 52-13 3-Directional Bumper 52-13

2-Directional 52-13 with base plate, 3-Directional 52-13 with base plate,
lift off protection and upper welding plate lift off protection and upper welding plate
Base plate with welding fixture

Flintec load cell supports are designed to prevent unwanted Important features
forces from affecting load cell performance. • 2 Versions available: 2-directional and
The Type 52-13 is a sliding system designed for hopper, tank 3-directional bumper.
and mixer weighing; combining excellent load introduction with • Blind hole load introduction.
low profile design and low cost for the basic system. • Capacity range 20 kg to 10000 kg.
The system is available in 2 versions: • Low profile.
• 2-directional bumper for standard applications, • Very easy to install.
• 3-directional bumper for special applications. • No check links needed.
Both variants can be used with free sliding units. • Installation by bolting or welding.
• W&M certified for 3000 intervals.
The available options and accessories like base plate, lift off
protection, upper welding plate, and welding fixture make Options
installation easy and contribute to a totally very versatile and • Base plate, with jacking bolt.
rugged design. • Lift off protection.
Especially designed for SB4, SB5, SB6, SB14 and SLB load Accessories
B73 Rev1 UK 1(4)

cells. • Upper welding plate.

Material: steel, zinc plated; alternatively stainless steel. • Welding fixture.

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

Dimensions 2-directional bumper and free sliding units

L6
L7 W4
A accessory W1
welding plate
H4

T1
B B
basic
sliding system

H5 H7

A-A
H3 A T2

Beam Type
Note:

Load Cells
Side forces and lift off forces 2-directional bumper
option
H1 are safe up to lift off protection
nominal load cell capacity.

jacking screw (1x)

option base plate

H2 with jacking screw
free sliding

H6
next page

L2 L5
L3 L4

gap 2...3 mm

previous page 2-directional bumper

with lift off protection

W1 W2 W3

ground strap
B-B
D for bolted version of installation
L1 free sliding
with lift off protection

Load cell type H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H7 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 W1 W2 W3 W4 D T1 T2

SB4/SB5-5/10/20 kN 75 30 90 15 48 27 44 80 125 100 15 56 85 25 68 70 90 100 13 M10 M12
SB4/SB5-50 kN 110 50 130 20 65 45 62 105 160 130 9 50 110 30 94 100 120 140 16 M16 M20
SB4/SB5-100 kN 135 50 160 25 90 45 88 135 205 160 10 51 135 35 120 130 150 180 20 M20 M24
SB6-0.2/0.5/1/2 kN 78 40 90 12 42 36 30 55 115 95 5 46 70 20 54 60 80 80 8 M6 M8
SB14-0.5/1/2.5/5 klb 75 35 90 15 43 32 39 80 125 100 - 37 85 25 68 70 90 100 13 M10 M12
SLB-0.2/0.5/1/2.5/5 klb 74 35 89 15 42 32 38 80 125 100 - 17 85 25 68 70 90 100 13 M10 M12
All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.
Assembly drawings with installation instructions and CAD files for customer’s own application drawings are available on request.

Orientation of 2-directional bumper and free sliding units

drawing symbols
2-directional bumper
B73 Rev1 UK 2(4)

free sliding

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

Dimensions 3-directional bumper and free sliding units

L6
L7 W4
A accessory W1
welding plate
H4

T1
B B
basic
sliding system

H5 H7

A-A
H3 A T2

Beam Type
Load Cells
Note:
Side force Fr and lift off forces 3-directional bumper
option
H1 are safe up to lift off protection
nominal load cell capacity.
Side force Fa is safe up to
2x nominal load cell capacity.

jacking screw (1x)

option base plate

H2 with jacking screw
free sliding

H6
next page

L8 (ca) L2 L5
L3 L4

gap 2...3 mm

3-directional bumper
previous page
with lift off protection

W1 W2 W3

ground strap

D for bolted version of installation

B-B
L1 free sliding
with lift off protection

Load cell type H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H7 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 W1 W2 W3 W4 D T1 T2

SB4/SB5-5/10/20 kN 75 30 90 15 48 27 44 80 125 100 15 56 85 25 67 68 70 90 100 13 M10 M12
SB4/SB5-50 kN 110 50 130 20 65 45 62 105 160 130 9 50 110 30 103 94 100 120 140 16 M16 M20
SB4/SB5-100 kN 135 50 160 25 90 45 88 135 205 160 10 51 135 35 132 120 130 150 180 20 M20 M24
SB6-0.2/0.5/1/2 kN 78 40 90 12 42 36 30 55 115 95 5 46 70 20 ? 54 60 80 80 8 M6 M8
SB14-0.5/1/2.5/5 klb 75 35 90 15 43 32 39 80 125 100 - 37 85 25 65 68 70 90 100 13 M10 M12
SLB-0.2/0.5/1/2.5/5 klb 74 35 89 15 42 32 38 80 125 100 - 17 85 25 65 68 70 90 100 13 M10 M12

Orientation of 3-directional bumper and free sliding units

drawing symbols
3-directional bumper
main side load direction main side load direction Fr

Fa
B73 Rev1 UK 3(4)

Fr
free sliding unit

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

Type 52-13T Sliding System (allows tangential mounting) Dimensions

L7
L8 W4
A accessory W1
welding plate
H4

T1
sliding plate
B B

H5 basic
H7 sliding system

A-A
H3 A

Beam Type
Load Cells
T2
Note:
Side forces are safe up to option 2-directional bumper
H1 50% of nominal load cell capacity. lift off protection
Lift off forces are safe up to
nominal load cell capacity.

jacking screw (1x)

option base plate
with jacking screw

L6 L2 L5 2-directional bumper
L3 L4 with lift off protection
ground strap

previous page

W2 W3

for bolted version of installation

D
L1
B-B

Load cell type H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H7 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 W1 W2 W3 W4 D T1 T2

SB4/SB5-5/10/20 kN 85 30 1000 15 58 27 44 80 125 100 15 56 49 110 50 68 70 90 100 13 M10 M12
SB4/SB5-50 kN under development
SB4/SB5-100 kN under development
SB6-0.2/0.5/1/2 kN under development
SB14-0.5/1/2.5/5 klb 85 35 1000 15 53 32 39 80 125 100 - 37 49 110 50 68 70 90 100 13 M10 M12
SLB-0.2/0.5/1/2.5/5 klb 84 35 99 15 52 32 38 80 125 100 - 17 49 110 50 68 70 90 100 13 M10 M12

Tanks with tangentially mounted load cells

drawing symbol
2-directional bumper
B73 Rev1 UK 4(4)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type 56-01 Dummy Support

0.5 t...10 t

Beam Type
Load Cells
next page

The type 56-01 dummy supports have same height and can be Important Features
combined with corresponding capacity of weigh module type • Capacities 5 kN to 100 kN.
52-13. • Easy installation by bolting or welding.
The dummy supports are typically used in scale systems for • Tolerates large angular errors for tank foot
level control in tanks. They replace two of the weigh modules in and foundation plate.
tanks on 3 or 4 legs and give a very cost effective scale solution. • Allows thermal expansion/contraction.
The supports are dimensioned to take side forces in any • Very rugged design.
horizontal direction as well as lift off forces, up to 100% of Accessory
maximum capacity. The weigh module can therefore be of
• Welding plates top and /or bottom
simplest free sliding type and fitted with lift off protection only if
required.
If foundation plates and tank feet are prepared also with
mounting holes for the weigh module, the scale can later easily
be upgraded to a high accuracy load cell system by replacing
the dummy supports with weigh modules.
Material: Mild steel, zinc plated.
B123 Rev1 UK 1(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

Dimensions
H3
welding plate for top and/or bottom (accessory)

max 3° L3 (ca)

H2

H1

Beam Type
Load Cells
H2
gap 5 mm for thermal expansion/contraction
ØD for mounting bolts

W1 W2

previous page T

NOTE:
The support withstands side forces and
lift off forces to 100% of rated capacity.

L2
L1

Capacity Capacity in kg H1 H2 H3 L1 L2 L3 W1 W2 T D Mounting bolts

2/10/20 kN 510/1020/2039 75 10 15 100 80 28 100 80 M20 10 M8 8.8
50 kN 5099 110 18 20 120 94 35 120 94 M24 14.5 M12 8.8
100 kN 10179 135 22 25 150 120 35 150 120 M30 18.5 M16 8.8
All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.
CAD files for customer’s own application drawings are available on request.

Orientation of dummy support

1 2 drawing symbols

free sliding weigh module

(52-13)

dummy support
B123 Rev1 UK 2(2)

3 4

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type 52-31 Tension Adapter

20 kg...5 t

Beam Type
Load Cells
next page

Tension adapter 52-31 and SB4 load cell

Flintec load cell supports are designed to prevent unwanted Important Features
forces from affecting load cell performance. • Blind hole load introduction.
The Type 52-31 is a self aligning tension adapter assembly. • Capacity range: 20 kg to 5 000 kg.
Especially designed for the SB4, SB5, SB6, SB14 and SLB load • Very easy to install.
cells. • Especially designed to support suspended
Standard version: steel, zinc plated. loads and for hybrid scale conversions.
• W&M certified.

Examples

lever system
B14 Rev1 UK 1(2)

Tank weighing system with 3 load cells Hybrid scale conversion

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

Dimensions
L1 0.05 (load cell mounting surface)
L2 W

gasket
H3
o-ring

H1

H2

Beam Type
Load Cells
D

Load Cell Type Capacity in kg L1 L2 H1 H2 H3 W Tension rod D

SB4/SB5-5 kN/10 kN/20 kN 510/1020/2039 155 30 115 45 70 60 M16
SB4/SB5-50 kN 5099 190 40 165 70 95 80 M24
SB6-200 N/500 N/1 kN/2 kN 20.4/51/102/204 130 20 64 29 35 50 M10
SB14-500 lb/1 klb/2.5 klb/5 klb 227/454/1134/2268 139 30 115 50 65 60 M16
SLB-200 lb/500 lb/1 klb/2.5 klb/5 klb 91/227/454/1134/2268 139 30 115 51 64 60 M16
All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.
CAD files for customer’s own application drawings are available on request.

previous page Details Type SB6 Load Cell

L1
L2

H3

H2
load button

Details of connection to a load carrier

approx.3
(lift off
protection)

spherical washer set

load carrier
B14 Rev1 UK 2(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type BK2 Load Cell

Beam Type
Load Cells
next page

IP 67
APPROVED

Detail front end with loading arrow

Flintec load cells are designed to meet the most stringent Important Features
accuracy requirements. Certifications have been obtained • Capacities: 200 to 2000 kg.
from Weights & Measures Authorities, worldwide. • High accuracy.
BK2 load cells are available in the capacities from 200 kg to • Stainless steel construction.
2000 kg and include Accuracy Classifications GP and C3 • Protection IP 67.
according to OIML R 60.
• Very low profile.
They offer stainless steel construction and improved potting, • High input resistance: 1100 Ω.
making them suitable for use in tough industrial environments.
• W&M certified for 3000 intervals
These load cells allow very low profile platform design and offer (NMi: TC6024).
advantages in all kinds of weighing applications. • Calibration in mV/V/Ω.
Load introduction via threaded hole or through hole. • Factory Mutual approved.
The Flintec calibration technique (in mV/V/Ω) avoids time Option
consuming corner calibration in multiple load cell systems. • Explosion protection zone 0, 1, 2 and
The BK2 is available for use in hazardous areas zone 0, 1, 2 20, 21, 22 ATEX.
A53 Rev1 UK 1(2)

(gas) and 20, 21, 22 (dust) according to EEx ia IIC T6...T4 Mounting parts
T150°C ATEX. • Spacer plate.

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

BK2 Specifications
Maximum capacity (Emax) kg 200 / 500 / 1000 / 2000
Rated Output (Cn) mV/V 2 ± 0.1%
Calibration in mV/V/Ω (A...I classified) %Cn ≤ ± 0.05 (≤ ± 0.005)
Accuracy class according to OIML R 60 (GP) C3
Maximum number of verification intervals (nmax) n.a. 3000
Minimum load cell verification interval (vmin) n.a. Emax /10000
Combined error %Cn ≤ ± 0.040 ≤ ± 0.020
Creep error (30 minutes) / DR %Cn ≤ ± 0.060 ≤ ± 0.016
Temperature effect on minimum dead load output %Cn/°C ≤ ± 0.0040 ≤ ± 0.0012
Temperature effect on sensitivity %/°C ≤ ± 0.0020 ≤ ± 0.0011
Excitation voltage V 5...15
Zero balance %Cn ≤±5
Input resistance Ω 1100 ± 50
Output resistance Ω 1000 ± 2
≥ 5000

Beam Type
Load Cells
Insulation resistance (100 V DC) MΩ
Compensated temperature range °C –10...+40
Operating temperature range °C –20...+65
Safe load limit (Elim) %Emax 200
Ultimate load %Emax 300
Safe side load %Emax 100
Load cell material stainless steel 17-4 PH (1.4548)
Sealing potted
Protection according DIN 40.050 IP 67

Dimensions
128.5
Type H Mounting Torque**
bolts 76.2 25.4 14.2
BK2-200 kg 12.7 M12 8.8 90 Nm
BK2-500 kg 15.9 M12 8.8 90 Nm
previous page BK2-1000 kg 19.1 M12 8.8 90 Nm H
BK2-2000 kg 25.4 M12 10.9 120 Nm
** Torque values assume oiled threads.
edge of mounting plate
Ø13.5 M12 * 54
(BK2-xx kg-TH-Cx) (BK2-xx kg-TM-Cx)
Ø13 (2x)

31.8 31.8

All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.
* Unified thread 1/2-20 UNF is available (BK2-xx kg-TU-Cx).

Wiring
+ Input (green)
• The load cell is provided with a shielded,
4 conductor cable (AWG 24). Cable jacket polyurethane.
+ Output (white)
• Cable length: 3 m.
A53 Rev1 UK 2(2)

• Cable diameter: 5 mm.

– Input (black)
• The shield is floating (On request the shield can be connected
– Output (red)
to the load cell body).
Shield (yellow)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type 52-15 Height Adjustable Rubber Foot

200 kg...2 t

Beam Type
Load Cells
next page

Height adjustable rubber foot 52-15 and BK2 load cell (Height adjustable by rotation of the foot)

Flintec load cell supports are designed to prevent unwanted Important Features
forces from affecting load cell performance. • Capacity range: 200 kg to 2000 kg.
The Type 52-15 is an heigth adjustable, self aligning rubber • Low profile.
foot; combining excellent load introduction with low profile
• Available in 2 versions.
design.
• Very easy to install.
Especially designed for the BK2 load cells (BK2-xxx kg-TM-Cx
• Especially designed for platform scales.
and BK2-xxx kg-TU-Cx).
• W&M certified.
Available in 2 versions:
Accessory
• Metric version: Height adjustable by rotation of the foot, • Fixation plate (see Miscellaneous).
• Unified version: Height adjustable by rotation of pin from
top.
Material: stainless steel.

Examples
B85 Rev1 UK 1(2)

Platform scale with 4 load cells Tank weighing system with 3 load cells
(recommended base plate 52-00 included)
Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

Metric version
Height adjustable by rotation of the foot (BK2-xxx kg-TM-Cx)

M12 53.8

spacer

H2
20

H1

min. 26
max. 34

Beam Type
Load Cells
Ø80

155.8

Total height Load cell height *Extension *Remark:

Load Cell
H1 H2 above load cell
The height of the BK2 load cell (H2) depends on its maximum capacity.
BK2-200 kg 38.7...46.7 12.7 0...7.3 The loading pin has a thread length of 20 mm.
BK2-500 kg 41.9...49.9 15.9 0...4.1 At the minimum total height (H1) the loading pin extends significantly above
the load cell for the maximum capacities 200 and 500 kg.
BK2-1000 kg 45.1...53.1 19.1 0...0.9 This value is calculated in the column “Extension above load cell”
BK2-2000 kg 51.4...59.4 25.4 n.a. The height of the spacer should be adapted accordingly.
All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.
CAD files for customer’s own application drawings are available on request.

previous page Unified version

Height adjustable by rotation of pin from top (BK2-xxx kg-TU-Cx)

½-20 UNF 53.8

spacer

H2
20

H1

min. 26
max. 34

Ø80

155.8
B85 Rev1 UK 2(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type SB2 Load Cell

Beam Type
Load Cells
next page

IP 68
APPROVED

Flintec load cells are designed to meet the most stringent Important Features
accuracy requirements. Certifications have been obtained • Capacities 45000 to 100000 lb.
from Weights & Measures Authorities, worldwide. • High accuracy.
SB2 load cells are available in the capacities 45000 lb to • Complete hermetic sealing.
100000 lb (20412 kg to 45360 kg) and include Accuracy • Protection IP 68.
Classifications GP, C1 and C3 according to OIML R 60.
• W&M certified for 3000 intervals
(The SB2 45000 lb is also available in a low profile version: Type
(PTB: D09-03.04).
SB2-45 klb-M)
• Unique “blind” loading hole.
SB2 load cells offer complete hermetic sealing, making them
• Calibration in mV/V/Ω.
suitable for use in the toughest industrial environments.
• Easy cable replacement.
The unique “blind” loading hole combined with the available
• Factory Mutual approved.
Flintec loading hardware provides an excellent price-
performance ratio. Option
It allows very low profile platform design and offers advantages • Explosion protection zone 0, 1, 2 and
in all kinds of weighing applications. 20, 21, 22 ATEX.
The Flintec calibration technique (in mV/V/Ω) eliminates time
consuming corner calibration in multiple load cell systems.
The SB2 is available for use in hazardous areas zone 0, 1, 2
(gas) and 20, 21, 22 (dust) according to EEx ia IIC T6...T4
A25 Rev1 UK 1(2)

T130°C ATEX.

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

SB2 Specifications
Maximum capacity (Emax) lb 45 000 / 75 000 / 100 000
Metric equivalents (approx.) kg 20 412 / 34 020 / 45 360
Rated Output (Cn) mV/V 2 ± 0.1%
Calibration in mV/V/Ω (A...I classified) %Cn ≤ ± 0.05 (≤ ± 0.005)
Accuracy class according to OIML R 60 GP C1 C3
Maximum number of verification intervals (nmax) n.a. 1000 3000
Minimum load cell verification interval (vmin) n.a. Emax /5100 Emax /11200
Combined error %Cn ≤ ± 0.040 ≤ ± 0.030 ≤ ± 0.020
Creep error (30 minutes) / DR %Cn ≤ ± 0.060 ≤ ± 0.049 ≤ ± 0.016
Temperature effect on minimum dead load output %Cn/°C ≤ ± 0.0040 ≤ ± 0.0028 ≤ ± 0.0011
Temperature effect on sensitivity %/°C ≤ ± 0.0020 ≤ ± 0.0015 ≤ ± 0.0011
Excitation voltage V 5...15
Zero balance %Cn ≤±5
Input resistance Ω 385 ± 20
Ω

Beam Type
Load Cells
Output resistance 351 ± 1
Insulation resistance (100 V DC) MΩ ≥ 5000
Compensated temperature range °C –10...+40
Operating temperature range °C –40...+80
Safe load limit (Elim) %Emax 200
Ultimate load %Emax 300
Safe side load %Emax 100
Load cell material tool steel; painted
Sealing complete hermetic sealing; cable entry sealed by glass to metal header
Protection according DIN 40.050 IP68

Dimensions
L3 L4

previous page ØD2 (2x) W1

L7 2 holes for 45K only

L1 41 ØD1
W2 L2 L3 L4 L5 30°
A

H3

H1
H5 H4

A H2

Key L6 K1 ØD2 (6x) W1

K2 K3 (depth of key slot) L7 SECTION A-A

Mounting
Type L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 W1 W2 D1 D2 K1 K2 K3 Torque *
bolts
SB2-45 klb 318 38 159 89 n.a. n.a. 159 95 27 12 73 61 70 n.a. 38.1 31 n.a. n.a. n.a. M30 8.8 1500 Nm
SB2-45 klb-M 318 38 159 89 n.a. n.a. 148 82 12 12 58 47 70 n.a. 38.1 31 n.a. n.a. n.a. M30 8.8 1500 Nm
SB2-75 klb 375 44 181 76 51 248 187 118 24 13 86 71 95 51 38.1 22 25.4 47.6 10 M20 8.8 430 Nm
SB2-100 klb 416 48 197 92 54 276 210 143 41 14 111 92 95 54 50.8 27 25.4 47.6 10 M24 8.8 750 Nm
All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.
* Torque values assume oiled threads.

Wiring
+ Input (green)
• The load cell is provided with a shielded,
4 conductor cable (AWG 20). Cable jacket polyurethane.
+ Output (white)
• Cable length: 9.1 m for 45 klb,
A25 Rev1 UK 2(2)

10.7 m for 75 and 100 klb.

• Cable diameter: 7.6 mm. – Input (black)
– Output (red)
• The shield is floating (On request the shield can be connected
Shield (yellow)
to the load cell body).

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type 52-01HD Weigh Module

20 t / 45 t

Beam Type
Load Cells
next page

Weigh Module Type 52-01HD with SB2 load cell

Flintec load cell supports are designed to prevent unwanted Important Features
forces from affecting load cell performance. • Capacities: 20t and 45t.
The type 52-01HD weigh module with type SB2 load cell is • Ideal for high capacity, heavy duty, platform
designed for high capacity, heavy duty, platform scales. It is scales.
especially well suited for scales in the steel industry. For • Blind hole load introduction.
example ladle and scrap basket scales where the load is • W&M certified.
handled with crane on and off the scale and frequent
• Optional overload stop.
overloading occurs.
• Extremely rugged design.
For scrap basket scales the built in overload stop efficiently
• Easy installation by welding.
protects the load cell from impact loads when scrap is loaded
and being dropped from sometimes several meters height into
the basket.
Available as 3-directional bumper module resp. free sliding
module.
The bumpers of the 3-directional module can be rearranged to
achieve a number of different bumping configurations. See
examples on page 2(2).
A machined slot in the base plate prevents the load cell from
C122 Rev0 UK 1(2)

sliding when subjected to high side forces.

An overload stop can be added as an option and protects the
load cell from overloads up to at least 500% of rated load.
Material: Mild steel, painted.

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

Dimensions
L3 BUMPER MODULE
L4 W1
L5 W3

H1
41 H2 (ca)

overload stop

Beam Type
Load Cells
L2 W2
L1

FREE SLIDING MODULE

W3

H1
previous page

NOTE:
Side force Fr is safe up to 50% of load cell capacity.
Side force Fa is safe up to load cell capacity.

W2

Weight incl.
Load cell type L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 W1 W2 W3 H1 H2
load cell (kg)
SB2-45 klb 320 281 195 91 15 176 150 150 200 171 54
SB2-100 klb 430 370 235 130 25 260 180 200 284 238 128
All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.
CAD files for customer’s own application drawings are available on request.

Orientation of weigh modules

1 2 ACHIEVABLE BUMPER ARRANGEMENTS

drawing symbols

Fr
2-directional 3-directional
Fa
bumper module “right” bumper module

2-directional 1-directional
bumper module “left” bumper module
C122 Rev0 UK 2(2)

2-directional Free sliding

bumper module module

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

summary

Tension Load Cells

Load Cell Type ULB UB1 UB6
OIML / NTEP No/No Yes/No Yes/No
EEx (ATEX) Yes Yes Yes
Material Stainless steel
Hermetic sealing No Yes Yes
Protection IP 67 IP 68 IP 68
Maximum Capacity *
kg N
50 l
100 l
102 1000 l
200 l
204 2000 l
500 l
510 5000 l
1000 l
1020 10000 l
2039 20000 l
5099 50000 l
* The load cells are calibrated in kg or N depending on load cell type (bold print).

Load Cells
Tension
next page
data sheet data sheet data sheet
ULB UB1 UB6

price list price list price list

Characteristics of Tension Load Cells / Application Parts See next page

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

Characteristics of Tension Load Cells

Due to their design, Tension Load Cells are also called S-Type Load Cells. These load cells are especially designed
for applications with pulling forces or hanging load carriers. In combination with the application kit using two eye
bolts, a perfect load introduction is available.
It is also possible to use Tension Load Cells for applications with compression loads.
The Flintec range covers nominal capacities from 50 kg to 5 t. Hermetically sealed Tension Load Cells are available
from 100 kg to 5 t.

Typical Applications
Hybrid Systems with one load cell and lever work, hanging hoppers, weighing belts or other load carriers with
multiple load cells.

Mechanical Application Parts

Type ULB / UB1 / UB6
53-04 Tension Assembly l

Load Cells
Tension
data sheet
53-04

previous page

price list

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type ULB Load Cell

Load Cells
Tension
next page

IP 67

Flintec load cells are designed to meet the most stringent Important Features
accuracy requirements. Certifications have been obtained • Capacities: 50 kg to 5000 kg.
from Weights & Measures Authorities, worldwide. • High accuracy.
ULB universal load cells are available in the capacities 50 kg to • Total stainless steel construction.
5000 kg and include Accuracy Classifications GP, C1 and C3 • Protection IP 67.
according to OIML R 60.
• High input resistance: 1100 Ω.
Approved for tension loading only.
• W&M certified for 3000 intervals
Tension and/or compression loading possible. (in preparation).
They offer stainless steel construction and improved potting, • Complete range of loading hardware
making them suitable for use in tough industrial environments.. available.
The ULB is available for use in hazardous areas zone 0, 1, 2 Option
(gas) and 20, 21, 22 (dust) according to EEx ia IIC T6...T4 • Explosion protection zone 0, 1, 2 and
T150°C ATEX. 20, 21, 22 ATEX.
A38 Rev2 UK 1(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

ULB Specifications (Tension or compression loading possible)

Maximum capacity (Emax ) kg 50 / 100 / 200 / 500 / 1000 / 2000 / 3000 / 5000
Rated Output (Cn) mV/V 2 ± 0.1%
Accuracy class according to OIML R 60 (GP) C1 C3
Maximum number of verification intervals (nmax) n.a. 1000 3000
Minimum load cell verification interval (vmin ) n.a. Emax /6000 Emax /12000
Combined error %Cn ≤ ± 0.040 ≤ ± 0.030 ≤ ± 0.020
Creep error (30 minutes) / DR %Cn ≤ ± 0.060 ≤ ± 0.049 ≤ ± 0.016
Temperature effect on minimum dead load output %Cn/°C ≤ ± 0.0040 ≤ ± 0.0028 ≤ ± 0.0011
Temperature effect on sensitivity %/°C ≤ ± 0.0020 ≤ ± 0.0016 ≤ ± 0.0011
Excitation voltage V 5...15
Zero balance %Cn ≤±5
Input resistance Ω 1100 ± 50
Output resistance Ω 1000 ± 2
Insulation resistance (100 V DC) MΩ ≥ 5000
Compensated temperature range °C –10...+40
Operating temperature range °C –20...+65
Safe load limit (Elim) %Emax 200
Ultimate load %Emax 300
Load cell material stainless steel 17-4 PH (1.4548)
Sealing potted
Protection according DIN 40.050 IP 67

Load Cells
Tension
Dimensions
W L
D*

previous page

Metric thread D Unified thread D Unified thread D

Type H L W
-M -U -H
ULB-50 kg...500 kg 76.2 49 30 M12 x 1.75 1/2-20
ULB-1000 kg 76.2 49 30 M16 x 2 1/2-20 5/8-18
ULB-2000 kg 86.1 76.2 30 M16 x 2 5/8-18
ULB-3000 kg 88.7 88.7 40 M20 x 1.5 3/4-16
ULB-5000 kg 146 91.2 56.4 M24 x 2 1-12
* Versions with unified thread available: -U / -H.
All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.

Wiring
+ Input (green)
• The load cell is provided with a shielded,
4 conductor cable (AWG 24). Cable jacket polyurethane.
+ Output (white)
• Cable length: 6 m.
A38 Rev2 UK 2(2)

• Cable diameter: 5 mm.

– Input (black)
• The shield is floating (On request the shield can be connected
– Output (red)
to the load cell body).
Shield (yellow)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type UB1 Load Cell

Load Cells
Tension
next page

IP 68
APPROVED

Flintec load cells are designed to meet the most stringent Important Features
accuracy requirements. Certifications have been obtained • Capacities: 10 kN to 50 kN.
from Weights & Measures Authorities, worldwide. • High accuracy.
UB1 universal load cells are available in the capacities 10 kN to • Total stainless steel construction.
50 kN (1020 kg to 5099 kg) and include Accuracy • Complete hermetic sealing.
Classifications GP, C1 and C3 according to OIML R 60.
• Protection IP 68.
Approved for tension loading only.
• High input resistance: 1100 Ω.
Tension and/or compression loading possible.
• W&M certified for 3000 intervals
They offer total stainless steel construction and complete (SP: No 0402-MVm002).
hermetic sealing, making them suitable for use in the toughest • Easy cable replacement.
industrial environments.
• Complete range of loading hardware
The UB1 is available for use in hazardous areas zone 0, 1, 2 available.
(gas) and 20, 21, 22 (dust) according to EEx ia IIC T6...T4 • Factory Mutual approved.
T130°C ATEX.
Option
• Explosion protection zone 0, 1, 2 and
20, 21, 22 ATEX.
A10 Rev2 UK 1(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

UB1 Specifications (Tension or compression loading possible)

Maximum capacity (Emax ) kN 10 / 20 / 50
Metric equivalents (1 N=0.10197 kg) kg 1020 / 2039 / 5099
Rated Output (Cn) mV/V 2 ± 0.1%
Accuracy class according to OIML R 60 (GP) C1 C3
Maximum number of verification intervals (nmax) n.a. 1000 3000
Minimum load cell verification interval (vmin ) n.a. Emax /5000 Emax /5700
Combined error %Cn ≤ ± 0.040 ≤ ± 0.030 ≤ ± 0.020
Creep error (30 minutes) / DR %Cn ≤ ± 0.060 ≤ ± 0.049 ≤ ± 0.016
Temperature effect on minimum dead load output %Cn/°C ≤ ± 0.0040 ≤ ± 0.0028 ≤ ± 0.0024
Temperature effect on sensitivity %/°C ≤ ± 0.0020 ≤ ± 0.0016 ≤ ± 0.0011
Excitation voltage V 5...15
Zero balance %Cn ≤±5
Input resistance Ω 1100 ± 50
Output resistance Ω 1000 ± 2
Insulation resistance (100 V DC) MΩ ≥ 5000
Compensated temperature range °C –10...+40
Operating temperature range °C –40...+80
Safe load limit (Elim) %Emax 200
Ultimate load %Emax 300
Load cell material stainless steel 17-4 PH (1.4548)
Sealing complete hermetic sealing; cable entry sealed by glass to metal header
Protection according DIN 40.050 IP 68

Load Cells
Tension
Dimensions
L 41 W

previous page

D*
Type H L W Thread D
UB1-10k N/20 kN 92 86 30 M16
UB1-50 kN 136 143 43 M24×2
All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.
* Unified thread 5/8-18 UNF (10...20 kN) and 1-12 UNF (50 kN) is available.

Wiring
+ Input (green)
• The load cell is provided with a shielded,
4 conductor cable (AWG 24). Cable jacket polyurethane.
+ Output (white)
• Cable length: 6 m.
A10 Rev2 UK 2(2)

• Cable diameter: 5 mm.

– Input (black)
• The shield is floating (On request the shield can be connected
– Output (red)
to the load cell body).
Shield (yellow)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type UB6 Load Cell

Load Cells
Tension
next page

IP 68
APPROVED

Flintec load cells are designed to meet the most stringent Important Features
accuracy requirements. Certifications have been obtained • Capacities: 1 kN to 5 kN.
from Weights & Measures Authorities, worldwide. • High accuracy.
UB6 universal load cells are available in the capacities 1 kN to • Total stainless steel construction.
5 kN (102 kg to 510 kg) and include Accuracy Classifications • Complete hermetic sealing.
GP, C1 and C3 according to OIML R 60.
• Protection IP 68.
Approved for tension or compression loading.
• High input resistance: 1100 Ω.
They offer total stainless steel construction and complete
• W&M certified for 3000 intervals
hermetic sealing, making them suitable for use in the toughest
(PTB: D09-97.05).
industrial environments.
• Multi range accuracy.
The UB6 is available for use in hazardous areas zone 0, 1, 2
• Easy cable replacement.
(gas) and 20, 21, 22 (dust) according to EEx ia IIC T6...T4
T130°C ATEX. • Complete range of loading hardware
available.
• Factory Mutual approved.
Option
• Explosion protection zone 0, 1, 2 and
20, 21, 22 ATEX.
• C3 with Y=20400 (C3 MR).
A19 Rev2 UK 1(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

UB6 Specifications (Tension or compression loading possible)

Maximum capacity (Emax) kN 1/2/5
Metric equivalents (1 N=0.10197 kg) kg 102 / 204 / 510
Rated Output (Cn) mV/V 2 ± 0.1%
Accuracy class according to OIML R 60 (GP) C1 C3
Maximum number of verification intervals (nmax) n.a. 1000 3000
Minimum load cell verification interval (vmin) n.a. Emax/5100 Emax /10200
Temperature effect on minimum dead load output %Cn/°C ≤ ± 0.0040 ≤ ± 0.0028 ≤ ± 0.0012
Min. load cell verification interval (vmin) n.a. n.a. Emax /20400
Option
Temp. effect on min. dead load output %Cn/°C n.a. n.a. ≤ ± 0.0006
Combined error %Cn ≤ ± 0.040 ≤ ± 0.030 ≤ ± 0.020
Creep error (30 minutes) / DR %Cn ≤ ± 0.060 ≤ ± 0.049 ≤ ± 0.016
Temperature effect on sensitivity %/°C ≤ ± 0.0020 ≤ ± 0.0016 ≤ ± 0.0011
Excitation voltage V 5...15
Zero balance %Cn ≤±5
Input resistance Ω 1100 ± 50
Output resistance Ω 1000 ± 2
Insulation resistance (100 V DC) MΩ ≥ 5000
Compensated temperature range °C –10...+40
Operating temperature range °C –40...+80
Safe load limit (Elim) %Emax 200
Ultimate load %Emax 300
Load cell material stainless steel 17-4 PH (1.4548)

Load Cells
Tension
Sealing complete hermetic sealing; cable entry sealed by glass to metal header
Protection according DIN 40.050 IP68

Dimensions
61.5 41 30

previous page

61.5

M12 *
All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.
* Unified thread 1/2-20 UNF is available.

Wiring
+ Input (green)
• The load cell is provided with a shielded,
4 conductor cable (AWG 24).
+ Output (white)
• Cable length: 6 m.
A19 Rev2 UK 2(2)

• Cable diameter: 5 mm.

– Input (black)
• The shield is floating (On request the shield can be connected
– Output (red)
to the load cell body).
Shield (yellow)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type 53-04 Tension Assembly

Flintec load cell supports are designed to prevent unwanted Important Features
forces from affecting load cell performance. • Capacity range: 100 kg to 5 000 kg.
The Type 53-04 is a self aligning tension assembly. • Very easy to install.
Especially designed for the UB1, UB6 and UB5 load cells. • Especially designed for hopper scales,
Standard version: steel, zinc plated. tank weighing systems and hybrid scale
conversions.

Dimensions
T2

Note:
To optimize system
performance, install
the lower mount 90°
disposed to the upper
mount.
=

Load Cells
A A

Tension
next page

A H

=
Insulating washer
(option)

L
C

T1
A-A

Tension assembly 53-04 and ULB load cell

Load Cell Type Capacity in kg H L W A C T1 T2 max. safe static load in kN

UB6-1/2/5 kN 102/204/510 61.5 61.5 30 220 30 M12 M12 2/4/10
ULB-100/200/500 kg 76.2 49 30 220 30 M12 M12 2/4/10
UB1-10/20 kN 1020/2039 92 86 30 275 40 M16 M16 20/30
ULB-1000 kg 76.2 49 30 264 40 M16 M16 20
B15 Rev2 UK 1(2)

ULB-2000 kg 86.1 76.2 30 270 40 M16 M16 30

ULB-3000 kg 88.7 88.7 40 310 50 M20x1.5 M20 45
UB1-50 kN 5099 136 143 43 400 60 M24x2 M24 75
ULB-5000 kg 146 91.2 56.4 420 60 M24x2 M24 75
All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

Examples

spherical washer set

lever system

Load Cells
Tension
Improved connection to support structure Hybrid scale conversion

previous page

supporting
structure

oversized hole
to avoid
interference load carrier

Vertical safety check rod

B15 Rev2 UK 2(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

summary

Compression Load Cells

Load Cell Type RC1 RC3 RC3D
OIML / NTEP Yes/Yes Yes/Yes Yes/No
EEx (ATEX) Yes Yes No
Material Stainless steel
Hermetic sealing Yes Yes Yes
Protection IP 68 IP 68 IP68
Maximum Capacity *
t kN
7.5 l
15 l
22.5 l
25.5 250 l
30 l l
40 l l
40.8 400 l
50 l l
61.2 600 l
91.8 900 l
100 l
150 l
300 l
* The load cells are calibrated in t or kN depending on load cell type (bold print).

next page
data sheet data sheet data sheet
RC1 RC3 RC3D

Compression
Load Cells
price list price list price list

Characteristics of Compression Load Cells / Application Parts See next page

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

Characteristics of Compression Load Cells

Flintec Compression Load Cells are designed as Rocker Load Cells with a single column and offer an economic
and reliable solution in combination with a set of hardened loading cups.
The design provides a self centering function with a defined restoring force.
The range covers nominal capacities from 7,5 t to 300 t, all manufactured in stainless steel and hermetically sealed
according to IP 68.
A number of Weigh Modules with integrated bumper and lift off protection are available for hopper, silo, and tank
weighing applications.

Typical Applications
Weighbridges, big hoppers, tanks and silos.

Mechanical Application Parts

Type RC1 RC3 RC3D
55-01-07A Rocker System RC1 250...900 kN l
55-01-07C Rocker System RC3 30...50 t l l
55-01-07H Rocker System RC3 30...50 t l l
55-01-07D Rocker System RC3 7.5...22.5 t l
55-01-10 Weigh Module 7.5...22.5 t bumper (stainless steel) l
55-01-11 Weigh Module 7.5...22.5 t check link (stainless steel) l

Compression
Load Cells
55-20 Weigh Module 7.5...300 t l l

previous page 56-02 Dummy Support l l

Remark: Weigh Modules are completely pre-assembled.

data sheet data sheet data sheet data sheet

55-01-07A 55-01-07C 55-01-07H 55-01-07D

price list price list price list price list

data sheet data sheet data sheet data sheet

55-01-10 55-01-11 55-20 56-02

price list price list price list price list

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type RC1 Load Cell

IP 68

next page

Compression
Load Cells
APPROVED

Flintec load cells are designed to meet the most stringent Important Features
accuracy requirements. Certifications have been obtained • Capacities: 250 kN to 900 kN.
from Weights & Measures Authorities, worldwide. • High accuracy.
RC1 rocker column load cells are available in the capacities • Total stainless steel construction.
250 kN to 900 kN (25.5 t to 91.8 t) and include Accuracy • Complete hermetic sealing.
Classifications GP, C1 and C3 according to OIML R 60; NTEP
• Protection IP 68.
nmax=10000.
• W&M certified for 3000 intervals.
They offer total stainless steel construction and complete (NMi: TC2097 Rev. 4)
hermetic sealing, making them suitable for use in the toughest
• Calibration in mV/V/Ω.
industrial environments.
• Easy cable replacement.
The Flintec calibration technique (in mV/V/Ω) eliminates time
• Complete range of loading hardware
consuming corner calibration in multiple load cell systems.
available.
The RC1 is available for use in hazardous areas zone 0, 1, 2 • Factory Mutual approved.
(gas) and 20, 21, 22 (dust) according to EEx ia IIC T6...T4
Option
T130°C ATEX.
• Explosion protection zone 0, 1, 2 and
20, 21, 22 ATEX.
A13 Rev1 UK 1(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

RC1 Specifications
Maximum capacity (Emax ) kN 250 / 400 / 600 / 900
Metric equivalents (1 N=0.10197 kg) t 25.5 / 40.8 / 61.2 / 91.8
Rated Output (Cn) mV/V 2 ± 0.1%
Calibration in mV/V/Ω (A...I classified) %Cn ≤± 0.05 (≤± 0.005)
Accuracy class according to OIML R 60 (GP) C1 C3
Maximum number of verification intervals (nmax) n.a. 1000 3000
Minimum load cell verification interval (vmin ) n.a. Emax /4667 Emax /10000
Combined error %Cn ≤± 0.040 ≤± 0.030 ≤± 0.020
Creep error (30 minutes) / DR %Cn ≤± 0.060 ≤± 0.049 ≤± 0.016
Temperature effect on minimum dead load output %Cn/°C ≤± 0.0040 ≤± 0.0028 ≤± 0.0012
Temperature effect on sensitivity %/°C ≤± 0.0020 ≤± 0.0016 ≤± 0.0011
Excitation voltage V 5...15
Zero balance %Cn ≤± 5
Input resistance Ω 400 ± 15
Output resistance Ω 351 ± 1
Insulation resistance (100 V DC) MΩ ≥ 5000
Compensated temperature range °C –10...+40
Operating temperature range °C –40...+80
Safe load limit (Elim) %Emax 200
Ultimate load %Emax 300
Load cell material stainless steel 17-4 PH (1.4548)
Sealing complete hermetic sealing; cable entry sealed by glass to metal header
Protection according DIN 40.050 IP 68

Dimensions
recommended
main rocking direction
o-ring

Compression
4.5 H2

Load Cells
TOP VIEW H3 4.5
H4
previous page L1

H1

Ø10
S
Type L1 L2 H1 H2 H3 H4 D1 D2 D3 Smax* RF** 26 L2
RC1-250 kN 62 33 192 34 51 15 72 50 37 10.5 19 kN
RC1-400 kN 69 26 225 36 57 16 85 64 37 11 20 kN ØD3
RC1-600 kN 69 26 225 36 57 16 85 64 54.4 12.5 63 kN ØD2
ØD1
RC1-900 kN 69 26 225 36 57 16 85 64 54.4 9 94 kN
* Smax =maximum lateral displacement of load introduction. Recommended gap 3...5 mm.
** RF =restoring force at Smax and Emax.
All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.

Wiring
+ Input (green)
• The load cell is provided with a shielded,
4 conductor cable (AWG 20). Cable jacket polyurethane.
+ Output (white)
• Cable length: 12 m for RC1-250 kN,
16 m for RC1-400 kN,
A13 Rev1 UK 2(2)

18 m for RC1-600 and 900 kN. – Input (black)

– Output (red)
• Cable diameter: 7.8 mm.
Shield (yellow)
• The shield is floating (On request the shield can be connected
to the load cell body).
Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type 55-01-07A Rocker System

25 t...90 t

next page

Compression
Load Cells
Rocker System 55-01-07A with RC1 Load Cell

Flintec Bubble Level

Flintec load cell supports are designed to prevent unwanted Important Features
forces from affecting load cell performance. • Capacities 25 t, 40 t, 60 t and 90 t.
The Type 55-01-07A is a self aligning rocker system, combining • Low cost.
excellent load introduction with low profile design.
• Very easy to install.
Especially designed for the RC1 load cells. • Especially designed for weighbridges.
Material: steel, zinc plated. • W&M certified.
A mounting fixture is available for easy and accurate Accessories
positioning of foundation plates. • Mounting fixture.
The unique Flintec bubble level is available for accurate vertical • Bubble level.
alignment of the load cell. • Welding plate.
B40 Rev1 UK 1(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

Dimensions
recommended main rocking direction
A
25

put special
shims here 0.2/100
for height
horizontal
adjustment
within 0.4/100

ground strap
H (adjustable
by shims)

X
Note:
gasket Bumper stops are required.
Gap approx. 3...5 mm.
horizontal
within 0.4/100
X-X 0.2/100
25

X ØD M12(4x)
B

Compression
Load Cells
Load cell type A B D H
RC1-250 kN 110 176 68 252
previous page
RC1-400 kN 110 176 68 285
RC1-600 kN 130 196 88 300
RC1-900 kN 130 196 88 300
All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.
Assembly drawings with installation instructions and CAD files for customer’s own application drawings are available on request.

Accessories

upper
mounting plate

mounting fixture
H

foundation plate

grouting
B40 Rev1 UK 2(2)

The mounting fixture is used for easy and accurate positioning of the foundation The Flintec bubble level.
plate.

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type RC3 Load Cell

IP 68

next page

Compression
Load Cells
APPROVED

Flintec load cells are designed to meet the most stringent Important Features
accuracy requirements. Certifications have been obtained • Capacities: 7,5 t to 300 t.
from Weights & Measures Authorities, worldwide. • High accuracy.
RC3 rocker column load cells are available in the capacities • Total stainless steel construction.
7.5 t to 300 t and include Accuracy Classifications GP, C1, C3, • Complete hermetic sealing.
C4, and C3 MI 8 according to OIML R 60; NTEP nmax=10000.
• Protection IP 68.
They offer total stainless steel construction and complete • High input resistance: 1100 Ω.
hermetic sealing, making them suitable for use in the toughest
• W&M certified for 4000 intervals.
industrial environments.
(PTB: D09-99.09 Rev. 2)
This load cell design, in combination with a low cost self • Calibration in mV/V/Ω.
aligning rocker assembly, unites excellent load introduction
• Easy cable replacement.
with a low profile outline.
• Complete range of loading hardware
The Flintec calibration technique (in mV/V/Ω) eliminates time available.
consuming corner calibration in multiple load cell systems.
• Factory Mutual approved.
The RC3 is available for use in hazardous areas zone 0, 1, 2 Options
(gas) and 20, 21, 22 (dust) according to EEx ia IIC T6...T4
• Explosion protection zone 0, 1, 2 and
T130°C ATEX.
20, 21, 22 ATEX.
• Integrated surge arrestors (4x).
A48 Rev1 UK 1(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh
RC3 Specifications
7.5 / 15 / 22.5 /
Maximum capacity (Emax) t 30 / 40 / 50 / 7.5 / 15 / 22.5 / 30 / 40 / 50
100 / 150 / 300
Rated Output (Cn) mV/V 2 ± 0.1%
Calibration in mV/V/Ω (A...I classified) %Cn ≤ ± 0.05 (≤ ± 0.005)
Accuracy class according to OIML R 60 (GP) C1 C3 C4 C3 MI 8
Maximum number of verification intervals (nmax) n.a. 1000 3000 4000 3000
Minimum load cell verification interval (vmin) n.a. Emax /5000 Emax /15000
Combined error %Cn ≤ ± 0.040 ≤ ± 0.030 ≤ ± 0.020 ≤ ± 0.018 ≤ ± 0.015
Creep error (30 minutes) / DR %Cn ≤ ± 0.060 ≤ ± 0.049 ≤ ± 0.016 ≤ ± 0.012 ≤ ± 0.006
Temperature effect on minimum dead load output %Cn/°C ≤ ± 0.0040 ≤ ± 0.0028 ≤ ± 0.0009 ≤ ± 0.0009 ≤ ± 0.0009
Temperature effect on sensitivity %/°C ≤ ± 0.0020 ≤ ± 0.0015 ≤ ± 0.0010 ≤ ± 0.0008 ≤ ± 0.0010
Excitation voltage V 5...15
Zero balance %Cn ≤±5
Input resistance Ω 1150 ± 50
Output resistance Ω 1000 ± 2
Insulation resistance (100 DC) MΩ ≥ 5000
Compensated temperature range °C –10...+40
Operating temperature range °C –40...+80
Safe load limit (Elim) %Emax 200
Ultimate load %Emax 300
Load cell material stainless steel 17-4 PH (1.4548)
Sealing complete hermetic sealing; cable entry sealed by glass to metal header
Protection according DIN 40.050 IP 68

Dimensions
ØD1 H5
TOP VIEW
recommended H6 ØD2
main rocking direction
H4

Compression
H2

Load Cells
H7
previous page
H1

H8

H3
S

Type H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H7 H8 D1 D2 Smax* RF**

RC3-7.5 t 89 44 17 23 11 6 28 75 28 65 8 11 kN
RC3-15 t 89 44 17 23 11 6 28 75 28 65 7 20 kN
RC3-22.5 t 89 44 17 23 11 6 28 75 28 65 4.5 30 kN
RC3-30 t 140 70 26 28 13 6.5 39 84 39 81 10.5 34 kN
RC3-40 t 150 75 31 33 13 11.7 39 84 39 81 10 37 kN
RC3-50 t 178 89 32 34 17 8.5 44 94 44 99 9 51 kN
RC3-100 t 178 87 34.2 36 17 12 62 90 62 120 11.5 152 kN
RC3-150 t 210 101.4 40.4 38.6 20.6 12.8 76.2 109 76.2 160 14.5 240 kN
RC3-300 t 280 143.4 53.4 51.6 25 21.5 100 119 100 180 15 468 kN
* Smax =maximum lateral displacement of load introduction. Recommended gap 2...3 mm for 7.5...22.5 t, 3...5 mm for 30...300 t.
** RF =restoring force at Smax and Emax.
All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.

Wiring + Input (green)

• The load cell is provided with a shielded, 4 conductor cable
(AWG 24 for 7.5 to 22.5 t / AWG 20 for 30 to 300 t). + Output (white)
Cable jacket polyurethane.
• Cable length: 12 m for 7.5 to 22.5 t,
A48 Rev1 UK 2(2)

– Input (black)
18 m for 30 to 300 t. – Output (red)
• Cable diameter: 5 mm for 7.5 to 22.5 t, Shield (yellow)
7.8 mm for 30 to 300 t.
• The shield is floating (On request the shield can be connected to the load cell body).

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type RC3D Digital Load Cell

RC3D #1 RC3D #2 RC3D #n

•••

next page

KPF-D FT-03

Compression
Load Cells
System Configuration with RC3D Components

The RC3D is the DIGITAL version of the very successful RC3. Flintec The load cells offer total stainless steel construction
integrated a state of the art microprocessor system into the load cell and complete hermetic sealing, making them
to improve system accuracy, and load cell handling. RC3D rocker suitable for use in the toughest industrial
column load cells are available in the capacities 30 t to 50 t and include environments.
Accuracy Classifications GP, C1, C3, C4 and C6 according to OIML R This load cell design in combination with a low cost
60. self aligning rocker assembly unites excellent load
The digital output enables the user to communicate with each load cell introduction with a low profile outline.
independently of the others in the system. It offers advantages in
system setup, corner adjustment, system calibration, fault finding and
load cell replacement. Important Features
• Capacities: 30 t to 50 t.
The digital output from the RC3D can be directly connected to a
computer, PLC or others. Flintec added two more components to help • High accuracy.
the user with his system configuration: a junction box and a weight • Easy communication and system setup.
indicator. • Additional RC3D system components available:
The junction box KPF-D connects multiple RC3D load cells. The KPF-D junction box and FT-03 weight indicator.
polyester box is designed to connect 4 to 8 load cells in a bus • Total stainless steel construction.
configuration (cascade). • Complete hermetic sealing, protection IP 68.
The Flintec FT-03 weight indicator (with alibi memory) can be used with • Easy cable replacement.
analogue load cells and the RC3D load cells. Analogue / Digital load • Complete range of loading hardware available.
cells selection by parameter setting. Programming and calibration of
the individual RC3D load cells is possible via the keys available or
more comfortly via laptop or PC connected. The unit incorporates the
A95 Rev1 UK 1(2)

power supply for all RC3D load cells connected. The unit can be
connected to a PC system for further data management.

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

RC3D Specifications
Maximum capacity (Emax ) t 30 / 40 / 50
Rated Output (=RO) counts 200 000
Accuracy class according to OIML R 60 (GP) C1 C3 C4
Maximum number of verification intervals (nmax) n.a. 1000 3000 4000
Minimum load cell verification interval (vmin ) n.a. Emax /5000 Emax /15000
Combined error %RO ≤ ± 0.040 ≤ ± 0.030 ≤ ± 0.020 ≤ ± 0.018
Creep error (30 minutes) / DR %RO ≤ ± 0.060 ≤ ± 0.049 ≤ ± 0.016 ≤ ± 0.012
Temperature effect on minimum dead load output %RO/°C ≤ ± 0.0040 ≤ ± 0.0028 ≤ ± 0.0009 ≤ ± 0.0009
Temperature effect on sensitivity %/°C ≤ ± 0.0020 ≤ ± 0.0015 ≤ ± 0.0010 ≤ ± 0.0008
Converter type Sigma-Delta ratiometric
Conversion rate 3 to 70 Hertz (selectable)
FIR automatically adjusted to conversion rate
Digital filter
plus Rolling Average (1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32 samples) post filtering
Internal resolution counts 550 000
RS485A half duplex, multidrop with networking address, 2400 to 38400 baud
Asynchrone interface
Baudrate, data bits, parity and data output are programmable
Number of bus addresses 32
Excitation voltage V 9...12
Current consumption mA 40
Compensated temperature range °C –10...+40
Operating temperature range °C –40...+80
Safe load limit (Elim) %Emax 200
Ultimate load %Emax 300
Load cell material stainless steel 17-4 PH (1.4548)
Sealing complete hermetic sealing; cable entry sealed by glass to metal header
Protection according DIN 40.050 IP 68

Dimensions

Compression
ØD1 TOP VIEW

Load Cells
H5
recommended H6 ØD2
main rocking direction
previous page H4

H2

H7

H1

H8

H3
S

Type H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H7 H8 D1 D2 Smax* RF**

RC3D-30 t / 40 t 150 70 26 28 13 6.5 39 84 39 81 12 27 kN
RC3D-50 t 178 89 32 34 17 8.5 44 94 44 99 9 51 kN
* Smax =maximum lateral displacement of load introduction. Recommended gap3...5 mm.
** RF =restoring force at Smax and Emax.
All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.

Wiring 6-pin glass

to metal header
• The load cell is provided with a + (white)
3
3x twisted pair cable (AWG 24) and shield Power supply

according DIN 47 100. 4 – (brown)

Microprocessor System

• Cable length: 18 m. 5 A (yellow)

• Cable diameter: 7.4 mm. RS485A out

2 B (green)
• The shield is connected to the load cell body.
A95 Rev1 UK 2(2)

6 A (grey)
RS485A in
1 B (pink)

Shield (transparant)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type 55-01-07C Rocker System

30 t...50 t

next page

Compression
Load Cells
Rocker System 55-01-07C with RC3 Load Cell

Flintec Bubble Level

Flintec load cell supports are designed to prevent unwanted Important Features
forces from affecting load cell performance. • Capacity 30 t, 40 t and 50 t.
The Type 55-01-07C is a self aligning rocker system, combining • Low cost.
excellent load introduction with low profile design.
• Very easy to install.
Especially designed for the RC3/RC3D load cells. • Especially designed for weighbridges.
Material: steel, zinc plated. • W&M certified.
A mounting fixture is available for easy and accurate Accessories
positioning of foundation plates. • Mounting fixture.
The unique Flintec bubble level is available for accurate vertical • Bubble level.
alignment of the load cell. • Welding plate.
B49 Rev1 UK 1(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

Dimensions
recommended main rocking direction
A
25

put special
shims here 0.2/100
for height horizontal
adjustment within 0.4/100

ground strap

H (adjustable
by shims)
Note:
Bumper stops are required.
Gap approx. 3...5 mm.
X
horizontal
within 0.4/100
X-X
0.2/100
25

X M12(4x)
ØD
B

Compression
Load Cells
Load Cell Type A B D H
RC3-30 t / RC3D-30 t 110 176 68 200 / 210
previous page
RC3-40 t / RC3D-40 t 110 176 68 210
RC3-50 t / RC3D-50 t 130 196 88 240
All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.
Assembly drawings with installation instructions and CAD files for customer’s own application drawings are available on request.

Accessories

upper
mounting plate

mounting fixture
H

foundation plate

grouting
B49 Rev1 UK 2(2)

The mounting fixture is used for easy and accurate positioning of the foundation The Flintec bubble level.
plate.

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type 55-01-07H Rocker System

30 t and 40 t

next page

Compression
Load Cells
Rocker System 55-01-07H with RC3 Load Cell

Flintec Bubble Level

Flintec load cell supports are designed to prevent unwanted Important Features
forces from affecting load cell performance. • Capacity 30 t and 40 t.
The Type 55-01-07H is a self aligning rocker system, combining • Low cost.
excellent load introduction with low profile design.
• Very easy to install.
Especially designed for the RC3/RC3D load cells. • Especially designed for weigh bridges.
Material: steel, zinc plated. • W&M certified.
The unique Flintec bubble level is available for accurate vertical Accessories
alignment of the load cell. • Bubble level.
B79 Rev1 UK 1(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

Dimensions

Ø85
64 Ø165

M8 (2x)

200

A A
*H
120°

* H = 52 mm for RC3-30 t A-A

= 42 mm for RC3-40 t
= 42 mm for RC3D-30t and RC3D-40t

M16 (3x)

Compression
Load Cells
All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.
previous page Assembly drawings with installation instructions and CAD files for customer’s own application drawings are available on request.
B79 Rev1 UK 2(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type 55-01-07D Rocker System

7.5 t...22.5 t

next page

Compression
Load Cells
Rocker System 55-01-07D with RC3 Load Cell

Flintec load cell supports are designed to prevent unwanted Important Features
forces from affecting load cell performance. • Capacity 7.5 t, 15 t and 22.5 t.
The Type 55-01-07D is a self aligning rocker system, combining • Very low profile.
excellent load introduction with low profile design.
• Low cost.
Especially designed for the RC3/RC3D load cells. • Very easy to install.
Material: steel, zinc plated. • Especially designed for medium and high
An alignment fixture is available for accurate vertical alignment capacity platform scales.
of the load cell. • W&M certified.
Accessories
• Alignment fixture.
• Welding plate.
B74 Rev1 UK 1(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

Dimensions

130

B B

20
A A-A
Ø50
150
110

Notes:
M12 • Bumper stops are required.
40

Compression
Gap approx. 2...3 mm.

Load Cells
60 • Mounting surfaces to be horizontal
within 0,4/100.
previous page

As alternative to bolting
Ø22 B-B a4 plates can be welded.

All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.
Assembly drawings with installation instructions and CAD files for customer’s own application drawings are available on request.

Accessory
large sphere

C C

C-C

(Ø70)
B74 Rev1 UK 2(2)

alignment fixture

The alignment fixture is used for easy and accurate positioning.

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type 55-01-10 Weigh Module

7.5 t...22.5 t

next page

Compression
Load Cells
Weigh Module 55-01-10 with RC3 Load Cell

Pre-assembled module

Flintec load cell supports are designed to prevent unwanted Important Features
forces from affecting load cell performance. • Capacities 7.5 t, 15 t and 22.5 t.
The Type 55-01-10 is a self aligning weigh module, with • Very easy to install.
excellent load introduction.
• Very rugged.
The module is especially designed for using Flintec rocker • Especially designed for hopper and tank
column load cells in hopper and tank weighing applications. weighing.
The module incorporates an integrated bumper stop
• Integrated bumper stop for highest
eliminating the need for check links thereby offering highest
accuracy.
possible precision.
• Integrated lift off protection.
The Weigh Module will be shipped pre-assembled; ready for
• Load cell replacement requires minimum
installation by bolting or welding.
C66 Rev1 UK 1(2)

lifting height.
Material: stainless steel. • W&M certified.

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

Dimensions

bumper gap 5 mm

25
lift off gap
2 mm

ground
130
strap

A A
25

Ø28 M20 mounting screws (4x) to be used

130 in combination with washer 21x37x3.
65 Screws to be torqued 400 Nm.

120
A-A
Symmetrical hole picture with 4 holes allows
orientation at installation in 90° steps.

65
Notes:
• Tank foot and foundation plate to be horizontal within 0.4/100.
• Maximum force on bumper: 75 kN.
130 180
• Maximum force on lift off protection: 75 kN.
• Module weight excluding load cell: 11 kg.

Compression
Load Cells
previous page

a6 Remark: Welding instead of bolting is a very practical alternative

eliminating problems of getting holes on top and bottom lined up.
(Weld as shown)

All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.
Assembly drawings with installation instructions and CAD files for customer’s own application drawings are available on request.

Module assembled for shipment and installation

bracket for shipment 120 123

and installation
C66 Rev1 UK 2(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type 55-01-11 Weigh Module

7.5 t...22.5 t

next page

Compression
Load Cells
Weigh Module 55-01-11 with RC3 Load Cell

Pre-assembled module

Flintec load cell supports are designed to prevent unwanted Important Features
forces from affecting load cell performance. • Capacities 7.5 t, 15 t and 22.5 t.
The Type 55-01-11 is a self aligning weigh module, with • Very easy to install.
excellent load introduction.
• Very rugged.
The module is especially designed for using Flintec rocker • Especially designed for hopper and tank
column load cells in hopper and tank weighing applications weighing with slow moving agitators.
and incorporates an integrated check link to eliminate
• With integrated lift off protection.
oscillations caused by slow moving agitators etc.
• Load cell replacement requires minimum
The Weigh Module will be shipped completely pre-assembled lifting height.
including a blocking plate; ready for installation by welding or
bolting.
C67 Rev1 UK 1(2)

Material: steel, zinc plated; alternatively stainless steel.

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

Dimensions

check link

130
A A

ground
strap
25

check link lift off protection

Ø28

M20 mounting screws (4x) to be used

106 in combination with washer 21x37x3.
68 30 Screws to be torqued 400 Nm.

next page

130

200

Compression
Load Cells
Notes:
previous page • Tank foot and foundation plate to be horizontal within 0.4/100.
• Maximum force on check link: 70 kN.
• Maximum force on lift off protection: 100 kN.
• Module weight excluding load cell: 13 kg.

Remark: Welding instead of bolting is a very practical alternative

A-A eliminating problems of getting holes on top and bottom lined up.
a4
(Weld as shown)

All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.
Assembly drawings with installation instructions and CAD files for customer’s own application drawings are available on request.
Note:
3 Loading points are equiped with check links; all others without check link.
See page 105: Check link orientation.

Module assembled for shipment and installation

bracket for shipment

130
and installation
C67 Rev1 UK 2(2)

blocking bar (2x)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

Check link orientation for Weigh Module 55-01-11

4 LOAD CELLS

Compression
Load Cells
previous page

3 LOAD CELLS

2x

x
C77 Rev1 UK CL-Orientation

drawing symbols

unit with check link unit without check link

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type 55-20 Weigh Module

7.5 t...300 t

next page

Compression
Load Cells
Weigh Module 55-20 with RC3 Load Cell

Pre-assembled module ready for installation

Flintec load cell supports are designed to prevent unwanted Important Features
forces from affecting load cell performance. • Capacities 7.5 t...300 t.
The Type 55-20 is a self aligning weigh module, with excellent • Very easy to install.
load introduction.
• Especially designed for hopper and tank
The module is especially designed for using Flintec rocker weighing.
column load cells in hopper and tank weighing applications. • With integrated bumper stop for highest
The module incorporates an integrated bumper stop precision.
eliminating the need of using check links thereby offering
• With integrated lift off protection.
highest possible precision.
• Load cell replacement requires minimum
The Weigh Module will be shipped completely pre- assembled ; lifting height.
ready for installation by welding or bolting.
• W&M certified.
C96 Rev1 UK 1(2)

Material: cast mild steel, painted.

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

Dimensions

Load center L2
W2 = L3 =
= W3 = L4
T2 (for mounting bolts, 4x)
S3 bumping gap

H4
lift off gap

H2
A A

H3
General ØD1
The module can preferably be welded to tank foot
and foundation plate. This eliminates problems of L5
getting holes on top and bottom lined up.
Or for example bolted on top and welded on bottom.

=
Attention:
• Mounting bolts are not included in delivery.

Compression
Load Cells
• Silo foot and foundation plate to be horizontal
within 0.4/100.
previous page
The weigh module can also be installed up side down

W1
W3
as shown below in order to get through holes ØD2
on top.

=
A-A

L4 ØD2 (for bolt size T2)

= L3 =
L1

Max lift off Max side Weigh excl

Load cell type D1 D2 H2 H3 H4 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 W1 W2 W3 S3 T2
force (kN) * force (kN) * load cell (kg)
RC3-7.5/15/22.5 t 50 17.5 130 20 30 166 160 130 25 100 136 130 100 5 M16 100 50 15
RC3-30/40 t 60 22 200 28 40 220 210 170 30 125 160 150 110 6 M20 180 90 33
RC3-50/100 t 85 26 250 34 50 260 250 200 45 165 210 200 150 7 M24 300 150 65
RC3-150 t 110 33 300 40 60 300 290 230 60 205 260 250 190 8 M30 400 200 113
RC3-300 t 135 39 400 60 70 370 350 280 65 235 320 300 230 10 M36 600 300 225

* Note
• In tank / silo applications with 3 respectively 4 weigh modules can be assumed that minimum 2 modules will equally share actual side force
(wind) on the tank / silo.
• Actual lift off force shall, for worst case, be assumed being taken by one module.

All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.
C96 Rev1 UK 2(2)

Assembly drawings with installation instructions and CAD files for customer’s own application drawings are available on request.

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type 56-02 Dummy Support

7.5 t...40 t

next page

The type 56-02 dummy supports have same height and can be Important Features
combined with corresponding capacity of weigh modules type • Capacities 7.5 t to 40 t.
55-20, 55-01-10 and 55-01-07C/D rocker system. • Easy installation by bolting or welding.
The dummy supports are typically used in scale systems for • Tolerates large angular errors for tank foot
level control in tanks. They replace two of the weigh modules in and foundation plate.
tanks on 3 or 4 legs and give a very cost effective scale solution. • Allows thermal expansion/contraction.
The supports are dimensioned to take side forces in any • Very rugged design.
horizontal direction up to 100% of maximum capacity. Accessory
Lift off forces are safe to 50% for the 7.5/15/22.5 t unit and to
• Welding plates top and /or bottom
100% for the 30/40 t unit.
If foundation plates and tank feet are prepared also with
mounting holes for the weigh module, the scale can later easily
be upgraded to a high accuracy load cell system by replacing
the dummy supports with weigh modules.
Material: Mild steel, zinc plated.
B124 Rev0 UK 1(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

Dimensions
H3
welding plate for top and/or bottom (accessory)

max 3°

H2

H1

H2
gap 5 mm for thermal expansion/contraction

ØD for mounting bolts

Compression
W1 W2

Load Cells
previous page

NOTE:
The support withstands side forces to 100%
of rated capacity.
Max. lift off force for 22.5 t unit is 50% and
for 40 t unit 100% of rated capacity.
L2

L1

Capacity Matches height of H1 H2 H3 L1 L2 W1 W2 D Mounting bolts

7.5/15/22.5 t 55-20 / 55-01-10 / 55-01-07D 130 22 25 180 140 180 140 18.5 M16 8.8
30/40 t 55-20 / 55-01-07C* 200 27 30 250 200 250 200 22 M20 8.8
* Requires special cups for 40 t.
All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.
CAD files for customer’s own application drawings are available on request.

Orientation of dummy support

1 2 drawing symbols

weigh module

dummy support
B124 Rev0 UK 2(2)

3 4

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

summary

Special Sensors
Type Short Description
The TULIP Transducer is designed to be implanted into the heart of the structure to provide dependable strain
sensing.
TULIP
The Press-Fit construction allows easy installation.
This load sensor gives the machine, device or structure an accurate load sensing capability by simply drilling a hole.
In addition to a standard range of load pins, Flintec is able to design and manufacture load pins to suit specific
customer applications.
LP1
Typical applications include crane and hoist load/condition monitoring as well as numerous applications in the fields
of safety, industrial measurement, vehicles and aerospace industries.

data sheet data sheet

TULIP LP 1

price list price list

Sensors
Special
This catalogue includes two types of special sensors; the Tulip press fit sensor and the load pin Type LP1.
Both can be used in various applications and are just examples in the wide field of individual straine gauge
sensors, the Flintec engineering team may develop on request.

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

The TULIP Transducer

The TULIP Transducer is designed to be
implanted into the heart of the structure
to provide dependable strain sensing.
Ø19.2 mm
The Press-Fit construction allows easy
installation.
This load sensor gives the machine,
device or structure an accurate load
sensing capability by simply drilling a
hole.

The economic solution for:

• Industrial weighing
• Level control systems
• Machine control systems

Its small size is remarkable; the knurled part "bites" into your structure
next page
The idea of developing a sensor capable of being sensing needs. Only the designer’s ingenuity limits the
integrated into a mechanical structure has resulted in application of this concept.
the TULIP Transducer. Compared to similar products in the market like Bolt-On
Its unique shape (sensing strain in 2 axes) combined types, the TULIP has specific advantages:
with proven strain gauge technology solves a wide • Because of its unique ability to sense strain in 2
range of actual application problems. axes, zero shift due to thermal effects are greatly
Installation normally requires only machining a suitable reduced.
hole in the structural part, and insertion of the sensor. • The TULIP is hermetically sealed.
The sensor’s accuracy combined with its stainless steel • The press-fit construction allows better long term
and hermetically sealed housing guarantees success stability.

Sensors
Special
in the worst hostile environments. • The press-fit construction allows installation in the
The sensor has unchallenged application versatility; neutral axis of the structure.
virtually any machine, device or structure can use this
sensor as a cost effective, accurate solution to your

Applications Features
• Silo weighing systems. • Capacity ranging from hundreds of kg to thousands
• Tank weighing systems. of t, all with the same sensor; depending on your
• Agricultural equipment. structure.
• Lift trucks. • Simple press fit mounting.
• Structural load measuring. • Easily installable in existing structures.
• Crane weighing. • Stainless steel construction.
• Crane overload protection sensing. • Hermetically sealed.
• Rolling mill sensing. • Minimal temperature effect.
• Machine tool wear sensing. • Measures:
- Compression,
• One-off special load cells.
- Tension,
• .....and your load sensing application.
A04 Rev2 UK 1(4)

- Shear,
- Bending,
- Torsion.
• Easy adaptable in OEM products.

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

Principle of operation
The TULIP Transducer operates on the following principle:
When a mechanical structure is subjected to an external load, the structure
changes shape to resist the force. Although the change is microscopic it can
be monitored by the sensor. If a small hole is made in the structure, the hole
will deform as the structure deforms in direct proportion to the load.
By inserting the sensor tightly into the hole, this deformation can be measured
extremely accurately (circular Ò oval = strain). Thus, the sensor effectively
turns the entire structure into a load or force transducer.

circular Ò oval

. The knurl
The figure shows the TULIP Transducer with its 3
principal axes.
The sensor has two principle axes of strain
measurement, disposed 90° to each other,
marked X-axis and Y-axis.
These sensitive axes are aligned in the middle of
next page the knurl. The sensor is not sensitive in the Z-axis.
The X-axis is the alignment-axis for the sensor. The
alignment marks show this axis on the front and
back diaphragms of the sensor.

. The alignment marks on the

previous page
front-side diaphragm

The principal axes of the sensor

The alignment

Sensors
Special
Care must be taken to properly align the sensor in the strain field in order to obtain correct polarity of the output
signal. The alignment mark on the sensor must be aligned with the principal axis of strain.
The alignment marks on the sensor indicate the X-axis. These marks have to be aligned with the principal axis of the
strain in the mechanical structure.
Depending on the mechanical structure and the applied load, various sensing methods may be employed. The
alignment of the sensor depends on these sensing methods.
The main sensing methods are: compression, tension and shear. But also bending and torsion can be measured.
Sensing methods are indicated below.
COMPRESSION TENSION SHEAR
A04 Rev2 UK 2(4)

alignment marks (2x)

The main sensing methods

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

Specifications
TULIP
Excitation voltage V 5...12
Input Resistance Ω 700 ± 20
Output Resistance Ω 700 ± 20
Minimum stress level:
For steel in compression/tension applications N/mm2 ≥ 20
For steel in shear applications N/mm2 ≥ 10

Output Voltage at this minimum stress level (=FS):

For steel in compression/tension applications mV/V ≥ 0.2
For steel in shear applications mV/V ≥ 0.2
Zero Balance mV/V ≤ ± 0.25
Non-Repeatability %FS ≤ ± 0.1
Temperature Effect %FS/°C ≤ ± 0.035
Operating Temperature Range °C -40...+80
Storage Temperature Range °C -50...+90
Insulation Resistance MΩ ≥ 5000
Sealing (DIN 40 050) IP 68
Cable length:
m 0.5
standard
m 10
optionally

A total system accuracy can be achieved between 0.5% and 5%, depending on the mechanical structure and the
environmental conditions.

next page

Dimensions
previous page cable length
Ø19.2 19 32

Sensors
Special
alignment marks diaphragms
knurl

The press-fit construction requires a precision hole.

This insertion-hole should be machined properly; dimension of the hole must be Ø19.05 ±0.05 mm.
The TULIP Toolkit is available to drill the hole and to press the TULIP inside.

Wiring
+ Input (green)
The TULIP Transducer is configured with a full bridge
circuit (Wheatstone bridge). This offers low
non-linearity, hysteresis and non-repeatability. + Output (white)
The sensor is provided with a 4 conductor shielded
cable, cable diameter 5 mm. – Input (black)
A04 Rev2 UK 3(4)

– Output (red)
Shield (yellow)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

Installation
For field installation, the TULIP Toolkit
is available.
This toolkit should be used to drill the
hole properly. It avoids problems of a
lack of perpendicularity to the load
axis, improper hole tolerances and
ovality.
The same tool can also press the
sensor into place.

The TULIP Toolkit

Notes
The location of the TULIP Transducer is very important. Ideally, the sensor should be applied to a structural member
at a point which is characterized by a uniform strain pattern.
Position the sensor as close as possible to the neutral axis of the force you wish to ignore. As an example: in the
drawing on this page the object is to measure the compression in the bar. Install the sensor in the centerline of the
previous page bar to avoid bending influences. Align the sensor properly.
The diaphragms are very sensitive. Take care not to damage the diaphragms during installation.
After installation, protect the sensor, hole and beam from corrosion by using primer, paint or other anti-corrosion
system.
After installation the sensor’s output can be calibrated to meet your systems needs. The maximum load depends

Sensors
Special
on your structure. Applications can have full scale loads ranging from hundreds of kg to thousands of t.
Attention: A zero shift will usually occur upon installation. The magnitude of the shift depends on the ovality of the
hole and the installation procedure used. This zero shift can be compensated in the electronic instrumentation
attached.

For much more details the TULIP Manual is available.

material thickness
minimum 4mm
insertion hole (mm)
Ø19.05 ±0.05

cable support
TULIP
FLINTEC

30...40
A04 Rev2 UK 4(4)

alignment marks
(for compression loading)

The structural arrangement

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type LP1 Load Pin

next page

IP 67

Flintec load pins are designed to meet the most stringent accuracy and environmental conditions.

Sensors
Special
In addition to a standard range of load pins, Flintec is able to design and manufacture load pins to suit specific
customer applications. Typical applications include crane and hoist load/condition monitoring as well as
numerous applications in the fields of safety, industrial measurement, vehicles and aerospace industries.
Load pins can be supplied with alloy or stainless steel construction and in a range of capacities. Designed to
measure force in a single axis, the internal strain gage sensing circuit is employed to ensure highest accuracy and
optimum reliability.
In addition, Flintec load pins are (can be) supplied with the calibration technique (in mV/V/Ohm) which eliminates
time consuming calibration in multi-pin applications.
Other designs of load pin with integrated electronic amplifiers are also available.
A125 Rev0 UK 1(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

LP1 Specifications
Maximum capacity (Emax ) t 1 / 2 / 2.5 / 5 10
Rated Output (Cn) mV/V 1.5 ± 0.1% 2 ± 0.1%
Accuracy %Cn ≤ ± 0.5
Repeatability %Cn ≤ ± 0.1
Temperature effect on minimum dead load output %Cn/°C ≤ ± 0.025
Temperature effect on sensitivity %/°C ≤ ± 0.010
Excitation voltage V 5...10
Zero balance %Cn ≤±2
Input resistance Ω 375 ± 10
Output resistance Ω 375 ± 10
Insulation resistance (100 DC) MΩ ≥ 5000
Operating temperature range °C –30...+70
Safe load limit (Elim) %Emax 150
Load cell material stainless steel 17-4 PH (1.4548)
Sealing potted
Protection according DIN 40.050 IP 67

Dimensions

L5 L6 L2
H

previous page

ØD h9 L3

W1 L4

Sensors
Special
W2 min. L1

Type D W1 W2 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 H
LP1-1/2 t 25 25 35 90 32.5 37 52 23 5 3.5
LP1-2.5/5 t 31.75 29 39 120 45.5 50.8 72.75 26 5 5
LP1-10 t 31.75 29 39 120 45.5 50.8 66.8 26 5 5
All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.

Wiring
+ Input (green)
• The load pin is provided with a shielded,
4 conductor cable (AWG 24). Cable jacket polyurethane.
+ Output (white)
• Cable length: 3 m.
A125 Rev0 UK 2(2)

• Cable diameter: 5 mm.

– Input (black)
• The shield is floating (On request the shield can be connected
– Output (red)
to the load cell body).
Shield (yellow)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

summary

Junction Boxes

Type Specification Special

KA-1 Aluminium for 1 load cell
KA-4/6 Aluminium for 4/6 load cells
KAEX-4 Aluminium for 4 load cells For hazardous areas, EEx(i)
KE-4 Stainless steel for load cells
KPK-4 Polyester for load cells With screw terminals
KP-4 Polyester for 4 load cells
KPF-4/6/8/10 Polyester for 4, 6, 8, 10 load cells With surge arrestors, for outdoor applications
KPB-4 Plastic for 4 load cells For PB/PBW load cells only

data sheet data sheet data sheet data sheet

KA-1 KA-4/6 KAEX-4 KE-4

next page price list price list price list price list

data sheet data sheet data sheet data sheet

KPK-4 KP-4 KPF-4/6/8/10 KPB-4

price list price list price list price list

Junction
Boxes

Characteristics of Flintec Junction Boxes See next page

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

Flintec Junction Boxes

Flintec offers a complete range of Junction Boxes for the connection of 1 to 10 load cells in different applications,
with the housing in polyester, aluminium or stainless steel.
Provisions for corner trimming are included.

The specific advantages are:

• Polyester
No corrosion in aggressive or wet environments.
Little tendency for moisture condensation with big temperature differences.
In most cases a polyester junction box is recommendable.
• Aluminium
Offers a certain electromagnetic shielding for the connection itself.
ATEX-Version available.
• Stainless Steel
Special low profile.
Fits perfectly to stainless steel constructions.

All junction boxes can be filled with a special potting material for perfect sealing against any moisture influence.
Most of the Flintec Junction Boxes are designed for connection through soldering.
Exceptions are ATEX-Junction Boxes and Type KPF-Junction Boxes for weighbridges, equipped with screw or
spring connectors to avoide soldering in hazardous atmosphere and at low temperature during weighbridge
installation.

previous page

Junction
Boxes

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type KA-1 Junction Box, Aluminium

next page

The painted aluminium junction box is designed to connect Important Features

1 load cell. • Connection for 1 load cell.
The junction box can be connected with a shielded 6-wire cable • Rugged aluminium industrial box.
to the instrumentation. • Protection IP 66.

Junction
Boxes
D69 Rev1 UK 1(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

Dimensions
98

34

86

M16x1.5 connection side output cable

Top view
Installation with
without cover
M4 x 15

64 36 1 2 3 4 5 6 interconnection wire (2x)

M12x1.5 connection side load cell cable

All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.

Wiring
+ Output
– Output
+ Sense

– Sense
Shield

+ Input

– Input
Output cable

previous page

1 2 3 4 5 6

Load cell Shield (yellow)

Junction
Boxes
+ Input (green)

+ Output (white)

– Input (black)

– Output (red)
Note:
• Cable gland M12x1.5 for cable diameter 3...6 mm.
• Cable gland M16x1.5 for cable diameter 5...9 mm.
D69 Rev1 UK 2(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type KA-4/6 Junction Box, Aluminium

next page

Type KA-4 shown

The painted aluminium junction box is available in 2 versions: Important Features

Junction box KA-4 to connect 4 load cells in parallel, • Connection for 4 or 6 load cells.
Junction box KA-6* to connect 6 load cells in parallel. • Rugged aluminium industrial box.
The painted aluminium junction box is designed to connect 3, 4 • Protection IP 66.
or 6 load cells in parallel.
One gland is sealed as indicated in the drawing. Junction
The junction box can be connected with a shielded 6-wire cable Boxes
to the instrumentation.
Corner trimming by resistors.

*Attention:
KA-6 in same box, but different printed circuit board and 2 more
cable glands.
D45 Rev2 UK 1(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

Dimensions
250

M16x1.5
52 M12x1.5 M12x1.5 M12x1.5 M12x1.5

Output cable
Load Cell 4 LC 3 LC 2 LC 1
238
Top view Installation with
without cover M4 x 20
yellow Shield Shield
–Sense
black –Input –Input

80 52 red –Output +Output

white +Output –Output

green +Input +Input

+Sense

Corner trimming (4x).

One cable gland Remove solder joint
is sealed. and install resistor if required.
Remove seal for
4 load cells application.

Type KA-4 shown.

All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.

Wiring + Output
+ Sense

– Output
– Sense

Shield
+ Input

– Input

Output cable

previous page

Load cell

2
Shield (yellow)
Junction
+ Input (green) Boxes

+ Output (white)
1

– Input (black)

– Output (red)

Note:
• Cable gland M12x1.5 for cable diameter 3...6 mm.
• Cable gland M16x1.5 for cable diameter 5...9 mm.
D45 Rev2 UK 2(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type KAEX-4 Junction Box, Aluminium, EEx (ATEX)

next page

The painted aluminium junction box is designed to connect up Important Features

to 4 load cells in parallel. • Connection up to 4 load cells.
The junction box can be connected with a shielded 6-wire cable • Rugged aluminium industrial box.
to the instrumentation. • Protection IP 66.
Explosion protection according:
• EEX ia II C T6
Junction
Boxes
Corner trimming by resistors.
D44 Rev1 UK 1(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

Dimensions
250

M20x1.5
52 M16x1.5 M16x1.5 M16x1.5 M16x1.5

Installation with
238 M4 x 20

Top view
without cover
connection side load cells

80 52
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

connection side output cable

All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.

Wiring

4 Connect: Shield=24 / +Input=10 / +Output=14 / –Output=18 / –Input=22

3 Connect: Shield=23 / +Input=9 / +Output=13 / –Output=17 / –Input=21
2 Connect: Shield=2 / +Input=8 / +Output=12 / –Output=16 / –Input=20

+ Input (green)

previous page
+ Output (white)
1

– Input (black)
– Output (red)
Shield (yellow)
Load cells

Junction
Boxes
* Corner trimming
resistor 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Output cable
+ Output
+ Sense

– Output

– Sense
+ Input

– Input
Shield

Notes:
• Cable gland M16x1.5 for cable diameter 5...8 mm.
• Cable gland M20x1.5 for cable diameter 8...13 mm.
D44 Rev1 UK 2(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type KE-4 Junction Box, Stainless Steel

next page

The stainless steel box is designed to connect 3 or 4 load cells Important Features
in parallel. • Connection for 3 or 4 load cells.
The junction box can be connected with a shielded 6-wire cable • Rugged stainless steel industrial box.
to the instrumentation. • Protection IP 65.
Corner trimming by resistors.
One cable gland is sealed. Remove seal for 4 load cells
application. Junction
Boxes
D86 Rev1 UK 1(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

Dimensions
200

Ø4.5(4x)
green
black
+SEN red
+EXI white
3 4
+IN
120 –IN
shield 30
2 1
–EXI white
–SEN red
black
green
shield

Corner trimming (4x).

210 Remove solder joint and
install resistor if required.

40

All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.

Wiring
+ Output
– Output

+ Sense
– Sense

+ Input
– Input
Shield

previous page OUTPUT CABLE

green
black
+SEN red
+EXI white
3 4
+IN
shield
–IN
2 1
–EXI white
–SEN red
black
green
shield

Junction
Boxes
4

Shield (yellow)

+ Input (green)

+ Output (white)
1

– Input (black)
D86 Rev1 UK 2(2)

– Output (red)

Note:
All cable glands PG9 for cable diameter 4...8 mm.

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type KPK-4 Junction Box, Polyester

next page

The polyester junction box is designed to connect 3 or 4 load Important Features

cells in parallel. • Connection for 3 or 4 load cells.
One gland is sealed as indicated in the drawing. • Rugged polyester industrial box.
The junction box can be connected with a shielded 6-wire cable • Cable connection with clamping terminals.
to the instrumentation. • Protection IP 66.
Cable connection with clamping terminals.
Junction
Boxes
Corner trimming by resistors and/or potentiometer.
D97 Rev1 UK 1(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

Dimensions
230

M16x1.5
50 M12x1.5 M12x1.5 M12x1.5 M12x1.5

Corner trimming (4x).

Output Cable
See Handbook.
Load Cell 1 LC 2 LC 3 LC 4
218
Top view Installation with
without cover M4 x 20
+RÜCKF +SENSE
+EINGANG +INPUT
GRÜN/GREEN +AUSGANG +OUTPUT GRÜN/GREEN
75 45 WEIß/WHITE –AUSGANG –OUTPUT WEIß/WHITE
ROT/RED –EINGANG –INPUT ROT/RED
SCHWARZ/BLACK –RÜCKF –SENSE SCHWARZ/BLACK

SCHIRM/SHIELD SCHIRM SHIELD SCHIRM/SHIELD

One cable gland is sealed.

Remove seal for
4 load cells application.

All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.

Wiring
– Output
+Output
– Sense

+Sense
– Input

+Input
Shield

Output Cable

+RÜCKF +SENSE
previous page
+EINGANG +INPUT
GRÜN/GREEN +AUSGANG +OUTPUT GRÜN/GREEN
WEIß/WHITE –AUSGANG –OUTPUT WEIß/WHITE
ROT/RED –EINGANG –INPUT ROT/RED
SCHWARZ/BLACK –RÜCKF –SENSE SCHWARZ/BLACK

SCHIRM/SHIELD SCHIRM SHIELD SCHIRM/SHIELD

Load Cell

3
shield (yellow)
Junction
+ input (green) Boxes

+ output (white)
4

– input (black)

– output (red)

Note:
• Cable gland M12x1.5 for cable diameter 3...6.5 mm.
• Cable gland M16x1.5 for cable diameter 5...10 mm.
D97 Rev1 UK 2(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type KP-4 Junction Box, Polyester

next page

The polyester junction box is designed to connect 3 or 4 load Important Features

cells in parallel. • Connection for 3 or 4 load cells.
One gland is sealed as indicated in the drawing. • Rugged polyester industrial box.
The junction box can be connected with a shielded 6-wire cable • Protection IP 66.
to the instrumentation.
Corner trimming by resistors.
Junction
Boxes
D46 Rev1 UK 1(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

Dimensions
230

M16x1.5
50 M12x1.5 M12x1.5 M12x1.5 M12x1.5

Output cable
Load Cell 4 LC 3 LC 2 LC 1
218
Top view Installation with
without cover M4 x 20 (4x)
yellow Shield Shield
–Sense
black –Input –Input

75 45 red –Output –Output

white +Output +Output

green +Input +Input

+Sense
Corner trimming (4x).
Remove solder joint
and install resistor if required.
One cable gland is sealed.
Remove seal for
4 load cells application.

All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.

Wiring
+ Output
+ Sense

– Output
– Sense

Shield
+ Input

– Input

Output cable

previous page

Load cell

2
Shield (yellow)
Junction
+ Input (green) Boxes

+ Output (white)
1

– Input (black)

– Output (red)

Note:
• Cable gland M12x1.5 for cable diameter 3...6.5 mm.
• Cable gland M16x1.5 for cable diameter 5...10 mm.
D46 Rev1 UK 2(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type KPF-4/6/8/10 Junction Boxes, Polyester

next page

The version KPF-8 is shown.

The polyester junction box is available in 3 versions: Important Features

Junction box KPF-4 to connect 4 load cells in parallel. • Connection for 4, 6, 8 or 10 load cells.
Junction box KPF-6 to connect 6 load cells in parallel. • Rugged polyester industrial box.
Junction box KPF-8 to connect 8 load cells in parallel. • Protection IP 66.
Junction box KPF-10* to connect 10 load cells in parallel. • Including surge arrestors.
Special designed for weigh bridges and silos, including surge • Additional mounting plate available.
arrestors for lightning protection.
Junction
The junction box can be connected with a shielded 6-wire cable Boxes
to the instrumentation.
Corner trimming by resistors. 340
A special mounting plate and
shield (stainless steel) is available 42
for easy installation and additional
protection.
40

170
15

*Attention:
KPF-10 in larger box.
D70 Rev2 UK 1(2)

interconnecting wire (ground)

Mounting plate and shield 5200-013 (not for KPF-10)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

Dimensions
(360)
320

(90)
M16x1.5 (9x)
80

Load Cell 1 LC 2 LC 3 LC n Output cable

304
Top view Installation with
without cover Corner trimming resistors
M6 x 30
2.1 Ohm installed.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 INDIKATOR
SPEISUNG +
INPUT +
RUECKF +
SENSE +

(160) 62 GRUEN

SCHWARZ
GREEN

BLACK
GRUEN

SCHWARZ
GREEN

BLACK
GRUEN

SCHWARZ
GREEN

BLACK
GRUEN

SCHWARZ
GREEN

BLACK
SPEISUNG -
INPUT -
RUECKF -
SENSE -

100 WEISS

ROT
WHITE

RED
WEISS

ROT
WHITE

RED
WEISS

ROT
WHITE

RED
WEISS

ROT
WHITE

RED
AUSGANG +
OUTPUT +
AUSGANG -
OUTPUT -
SCHIRM
GELB YELLOW GELB YELLOW GELB YELLOW GELB YELLOW SHIELD

INDICATOR

FLINTEC 3-3308 SCHIRM

SHIELD

surge arrestor (6x)

The version KPF-8 is shown. The versions for 4 and 6 load cells have identical dimensions. Wiring is similar.
The version KPF-10 dimensions between brackets. Wiring is similar.
All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.

Wiring

+ Output
– Output
+ Sense

– Sense
+ Input

– Input

Shield
previous page
Output Cable

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 INDIKATOR
SPEISUNG +
INPUT +
RUECKF +
SENSE +
SPEISUNG -
GRUEN GREEN GRUEN GREEN GRUEN GREEN GRUEN GREEN
INPUT -
RUECKF -
SCHWARZ BLACK SCHWARZ BLACK SCHWARZ BLACK SCHWARZ BLACK SENSE -
AUSGANG +
WEISS WHITE WEISS WHITE WEISS WHITE WEISS WHITE
OUTPUT +
AUSGANG -
ROT RED ROT RED ROT RED ROT RED
OUTPUT -
SCHIRM
GELB YELLOW GELB YELLOW GELB YELLOW GELB YELLOW SHIELD

INDICATOR
SCHIRM
SHIELD

Load cell

2
Junction
Boxes
3

Shield (yellow)

+ Input (green)

+ Output (white)
n

– Input (black)

– Output (red)
D70 Rev2 UK 2(2)

The version for 6 load cells is shown. Connections are similar for 4, 8 and 10 load cells.

Note:
• Cable gland M12x1.5 for cable diameter 3...6.5 mm.
• Cable gland M16x1.5 for cable diameter 5...10 mm,.

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type KPB-4 Junction Box, Plastic

next page

The plastic junction box is designed to connect 4 Type PB load Important Features
cells in parallel. The box is mounted on an aluminium plate for • Connection for 4 load cells with
proper mounting and shielding. AMP #103957-4 connectors.
The printed circuit board is designed to connect 4 PB load cells • Plastic box with mounting plate.
with AMP #103957-4 connector. • Corner trimming by potentiometers.
The junction box can be soldered with a shielded 6-wire cable • Protection IP 54.
to the instrumentation.
Junction
Corner trimming by potentiometers. Boxes
The junction box is available in 2 versions:
• with 10 W potentiometer for PB-C3 quality,
• with 50 W potentiometer for PB-GP quality.
D71 Rev1 UK 1(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

Dimensions

42

125
100

Solder tabs
for output cable (7x): Connector for PB load cells (4x)
– Output
+ Output
100 70
– Input
– Sense Installation with M4 x 10
+ Sense
+ Input
Shield

110
All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.

previous page

Junction
Boxes
D71 Rev1 UK 2(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

summary

Weighing Electronics
The Flintec Weighing Electronics program offers a wide choice of • Digital junction boxes
components for load cells or other stain gauge sensors: • Weighing indicators
• Remote display terminals
• A/D converters
• Analogue amplifiers

Digital Junction Boxes

Type Resolution Conv. rate Acc. class III Sensitivity Display Housing Remarks
d Hz (OIML R76) µV/e|µV/d
2 Setpoints, FIR filter,
FAD-1 550 000 14...1034 10 000 0.4 0.1 n.a. stainless steel
checkweigher modus
2 Setpoints,
FAD-4 550 000 8...80 10 000 0.4 0.1 n.a. stainless steel
digital corner correction
Controls up to 63 FAD's
FDT-A/B Display Terminal for FAD-1 and FAD-4 LED, 14 mm panel mount
Version B: Alibi memory + RS 232C

data sheet data sheet data sheet

FAD-1 FAD-4 FDT-A/B

next page

price list price list price list

Weighing indicators
Type Resolution Conv. rate Acc. class III Sensitivity Display Remarks
Housing
d Hz (OIML R76) µV/e|µV/d
2 Setpoints, alibi memory
FT-01 550 000 3...70 10 000 0.4 0.1 LED, 20 mm stainless steel Options: Second scale connection,
RT clock, RS 232C
2 Setpoints, alibi memory
stainless steel, Options: Second scale connection,
FT-02 550 000 3...70 10 000 0.4 0.1 LCD, 15 mm
wall/table top RT clock, RS 232C,
mains and battery operated
2 Setpoints, alibi memory,
LCD alpha- alpha-numeric keyboard,
stainless steel,
FT-03 550 000 3...70 10 000 0.4 0.1 numeric, RT clock, RS 232C,
wall/table top
13 mm Options: Second scale connection,
mains and battery operated
2 Setpoints,
FT-04 550 000 3...70 10 000 0.4 0.1 LED, 14 mm panel mount alibi memory,
RT clock
3 Logic inputs and outputs,
DAS 72.1 ±260 000 ...2400 n.a. n.a. 0.05 LED, 10 mm rail mounting analogue output 0...20 mA,
RS 422/485
Electronics

FT-01 FT-02
Weighing

data sheet data sheet data sheet

FT-01/02 FT-03 FT-04 DAS 72.1

price list price list price list price list

More Weighing Electronics See next page

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

A to D converters
Acc. class
Type Resolution Conv. rate Sensitivity Display Housing Remarks
III (OIML
d Hz µV/e|µV/d
R76)
Digital filter,
LDU 68.1 ±130 000 ...30 5 000 0.7 0.1 n.a. OEM plug in module 2 digital inputs and outputs
Option: Adapter board
Digital filter
LDU 68.2 ±130 000 ...30 n.a. n.a. 0.1 n.a. OEM plug in module
Option: Adapter board
Digital filter
LDU 69.1 ±1050 000 ...172 10 000 0.1 0.02 n.a. OEM plug in module
Option: Adapter board
Digital filter,
2 digital inputs and outputs,
LDU 78.1 ±260 000 ...2400 5 000 0.7 0.05 n.a. OEM plug in module
check weigher function
Option: Adapter board

data sheet data sheet data sheet data sheet

LDU 68.1 LDU 68.2 LDU 69.1 LDU 78.1

price list price list price list price list

Analogue Amplifiers
Type Output zero adjustment span adjustment Housing Remarks
Current|Voltage course | fine course | fine
Connection for 4 load cells,
FAA-24 0/4...20 mA 0...+10 V jumper potentiom. jumper potentiom. stainless steel
screw terminals
LAU 63.1 n.a. –10V...+10 V DIP n.a DIP n.a OEM plug in module Option: Adapter board
LAU 73.1 0/4...20 mA n.a. DIP n.a DIP n.a OEM plug in module Option: Adapter board
previous page
LAC 65.1 0/4...20 mA –10V...+10 V DIP potentiom. DIP potentiom. rail mounting Load cell cable check circuit
Safety circuit with logic output
LAC 74.1 0/4...20 mA 0...+10 V DIP potentiom. DIP potentiom. rail mounting
including LED display

data sheet LAU 63.1 LAU 73.1 data sheet data sheet
FAA-24 LAU 63.1/73.1 LAC 65.1 LAC 74.1

20mA/10V
1
Fine adj.

Fine adj.
0 0

20 4,0
2,5 0,5

40 8,0
80 16,0

13 4,0
40 0,5

7 8,0

500 0,33
5 1,0
10 2,0

4 16,0
30 1,0
20 2,0

16 10
50 3,3
5 33
NC 10
60 1,0
50 0,25

Off Relative

Pwr. OK
IN mV
f CUT

0-20/4-20
Pol. +/-

In range.
gain *

Under

Error
Over
Overflow -/+
5
10
20
40
80
160
320
0-3
2,5
5
10
20
40
-/+

1-2
2
4
8
16
32
0-20/4-20 mA
Int.PWR.ON

% at
+/- Load cell NC 11

160
Resolu.
On 2mV/V * 1000 n ms

Amplifier Unit
OFF SET ZERO Pot ccw = calib. SET SPAN Pot ccw = calib. SET FILTER OUTPUT CND
0 Gnd Zero 1 Gnd 12
t (ms) % of FS-in
input LAU 63.1
ON Rel.Gain(x)
1 + Exc 2 ± Vout 13 L-P-FILTER SET ZERO SET SPAN FLINTEC LAC 74.1
2 + Sen +/-mV 4 NC 14
3 + Sig +1* NC 15
LOAD CELLS 10Vdc 100mA Out Log Err. PWR
Span as Exc Sen Inp Inp Sen Exc 20mA/ 12-24Vdc
4 - Sig -10ºC/+40ºC NC 16 FLINTEC + + + _ _ _
U

relative +2* LAC 65.1 10V

Gnd I/V Gnd C + GND
5 - Sen gain 1* +4* NC 17 Galvanically isolated
6 - Exc LP filter 330 +Pwr 18
33 FLINTEC
1A

7 Gnd Hz Gnd 19 SUPPLY PWR. Load Cells OUTPUTS

8 NC 3300 3,3 www.flintec.net 12-24 VDC 3W VEX 2,5V 425Hz <60mA +/-10V 20mA

9 NC Exc Sen Sig Sig Sen Exc

+ + 0 0 + + + - - - Vo Io

price list price list price list price list

Remote Display
Type Display Interface Baudrate Housing Remarks
RS 232 / RS485 / Plus/minus sign and
FRD-57 LED red, 57 mm 1200...19200 stainless steel
20 mA current loop 5 digits
Electronics
Weighing

data sheet
FRD-57

price list

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type FAD-1 A/D Converter

next page

The FAD-01 A/D Converter is a very accurate, versatile, general Important Features
purpose instrument. It incorporates high performance , high • Approved for 10000 increments.
speed A/D conversion. • Single or dual scale interval.
The instrument is approved by Weights & Measures Authorities • Internal resolution 550000 counts.
for use in Accuracy Class III applications with up to 10000 • Conversion up to 1000 times per second.
increments (e) according to OIML R 76.
• Calibration by test weights or load cell
All communication via a bi-directional serial interface. This calibration data in mV/V.
allows very easy connection to any PC, PLC or other device • Checkweigher function.
with network capability.
• Analogue and digital filtering.
Standard weighing function are available: Auto zero • Serial interface RS485A .
maintenance, motion detection, auto-zero at power-up, zero,
• Multidrop communication capability.
tare, gross, test.
• Set points (2x) available.
Electronics

The unique calibration allows the use of dead weights to be

Weighing

Options
placed on the scale. But in cases where calibration with dead
weight is difficult (high capacity silos or hoppers) the calibration • Mains adapter 230 V AC / 9 V DC, 500 mA.
data from the load cell(s) can be used. • RS485A to RS232C converter.
The stainless steel housing offers the ideal solution for
industrial applications.
A display unit with 6 digits LED red, 14 mm including tactile 6
E59 Rev1 UK 1(2)

key keypad is available for remote operation.

See data sheet FDT-A/-B.

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh
FAD-1 Specifications
ACCURACY
Accuracy Class III
EU Type approved 10000 increments
A/D CONVERTER
Type Sigma-Delta ratiometric
Conversion rate 14 to 1034 Hertz (selectable)
FIR automatically adjusted to conversion rate
Digital filter
plus Rolling Average (1, 2, 4, 8, 16 samples) post filtering
Minimum input per vsi 0.4 µV per interval legal for trade, 0.1 µV per interval non approved
Analogue input range –0.25 mV/V to 4 mV/V (–1.25 mV to 20 mV)
Resolution Internal 550000 counts, display 100000 per mV/V input
WEIGHT OUPUT
Weight digits 5
Weight steps 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50
SCALE CALIBRATION AND FUNCTIONS
Calibration Calibration may be performed by application of weights or by the mV/V value of the load cell(s)
Auto zero maintenance, motion detection, auto-zero at power-up, zero, tare, gross, test
Weighing functions
Checkweighing function with up to 20 samples per second
Set Points 2 Set points, transistor output, optoisolated, 24 V DC, 100 mA
Digital inputs One input opto isolated, 24 V DC
LINEARITY AND STABILITY
Linearity Within 0.002 %
Long term stability ≤ 0.005% of full scale per year
Temperature coefficient Zero ≤ 2 ppm/°C (switched polarity), Span ≤ 2 ppm/°C
LOAD CELLS
Excitation +5 V DC or +5 V switched polarity
Number of load cells Up to 10 load cells 1100 Ω in parallel
Connection 6 wire technique
COMMUNICATION
Serial interface RS485A half duplex, multidrop with networking address, 2400 to 115000 baud (progammable)
POWER
Power requirements 7 - 10 V AC or 7.5 - 12 V DC, 200 mA
ENVIRONMENT AND ENCLOSURE
EMC According to OIML R 76 and EN 45501 requirements
Operating temperature –10 °C to +40 °C legal for trade / –20 °C to +50 °C non approved
previous page Storage temperature –10 °C to +70 °C
Humidity 90% RH max, non condensing
Enclosure Stainless steel, protection IP 65
OPTION
Mains adapter 230 V AC / 9 V DC, 500 mA
Converter RS485A to RS232C converter including power adapter 230 V AC / 9 V DC, 500 mA.
Display terminal See data sheet RDT-A / -B

Dimensions
200

Ø4.5(4x)

105 30
Electronics
Weighing

210
E59 Rev1 UK 2(2)

40

All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type FAD-4 A/D Converter

next page

The FAD-04 A/D Converter is a very accurate, versatile, general Important Features
purpose instrument. It is designed to connect 1 to 4 load cells. • Independent connection for up to 4 load
It incorporates high performance A/D conversion including cells.
digital calibration with individual digital corner adjustment. • Approved for 10000 increments.
The instrument is approved by Weights & Measures Authorities • Single or dual scale interval.
for use in Accuracy Class III applications with up to 10000 • Internal resolution 550000 counts.
increments (e) according to OIML R 76.
• Full digital corner calibration by test
All communication via a bi-directional serial interface. This weights or load cell calibration data in
allows very easy connection to any PC, PLC or other device mV/V.
with network capability. • Analogue and digital filtering.
Standard weighing function are available: Auto zero • EEPROM calibration data storage.
maintenance, motion detection, auto-zero at power-up, zero, • Serial communication RS485A for direct
tare, gross, test.
Electronics

connection to computer or other devices.

Weighing

The unique calibration and corner adjustment allows the use of • Multidrop communication capability.
dead weights to be placed on the scale. But in cases where • Conversion up to 80 times per second.
calibration with dead weight is difficult (high capacity silos or
• Set points (2x) available
hoppers) the calibration data from the individual load cells can
be used. Options

The stainless steel housing offers the ideal solution for • Analogue output; current.
• Mains adapter 230 V AC / 9 V DC, 500 mA.
E50 Rev1 UK 1(2)

industrial applications.
A display unit with 6 digits LED red, 14 mm including tactile 6 key • RS485A to RS232C converter.
keypad is available for remote operation.
See data sheet FDT-A / -B.

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh
FAD-4 Specifications
ACCURACY
Accuracy Class III
EU Type approved 10000 increments
A/D CONVERTER
Type Sigma-Delta ratiometric with integral analogue and digital filters
8, 20, 40, 80 measurements per second (setup selectable) devided by the number of load cells
Conversion rate
connected
Minimum input per vsi 0.4 µV per interval legal for trade, 0.1 µV per interval non approved
Analogue input range –0.25mV/V to 4 mV/V (–1.25mV to 20 mV)
Resolution Internal 550000 counts
WEIGHT OUPUT
Weight digits 5
Weight steps 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50
SCALE CALIBRATION AND FUNCTIONS
Calibration Calibration may be performed by application of weights or by the mV/V values of each load cell
Weighing functions Auto zero maintenance, motion detection, auto-zero at power-up, zero, tare, gross, test
Memories Serial EEPROM calibration memory
Set Points 2 Set points, transistor output, optoisolated, 24 V DC, 10 mA
Digital Input One input opto isolated, 24 V DC
Tilt sense input Inhibits weighing when scale is tilted
LINEARITY AND STABILITY
Linearity Within 0.002 %
Long term stability ≤ 0.002% of full scale per year.
Temperature coefficient Zero ≤ 2 ppm/°C (switched polarity), Span ≤ 2 ppm/°C
LOAD CELLS
Excitation +5 V DC
Number of load cells Up to 4x350 Ω load cells
Connection 4 wire technique
COMMUNICATION
RS485A half duplex, multidrop with networking address, 2400 to 115000 baud
Serial interface
Baudrate, data bits, parity and data output are progammable
POWER
Power supply 7 - 10 V AC or 7.5 - 12 V DC, 200 mA
ENVIRONMENT AND ENCLOSURE
EMC According to OIML R 76 and EN 45501 requirements
previous page Operating temperature –10 °C to +40 °C legal for trade / –20 °C to +50 °C non approved
Storage temperature –10 °C to +70 °C
Humidity 90% RH max, non condensing
Enclosure Stainless steel, protection IP 65
OPTIONS
Analogue output Current 0 - 20 mA or 4 - 20 mA, resolution 16 bit Full Scale
Mains adapter 230 V AC / 9 V DC, 500 mA
Converter RS485A to RS232C converter including power adapter 230 V AC / 9 V DC, 500 mA.
Display terminal See data sheet RDT-A / -B

Dimensions
200

Ø4.5(4x)

105 30
Electronics
Weighing

210
E50 Rev1 UK 2(2)

40

All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type FDT-A / -B Display Terminal

next page

The FDT-A/-B is a panel mount display terminal to be used in Important Features

combination with the FAD-1 and FAD-4 A/D Converters. • For remote operation of FAD-1 / FAD-4
The instrument is approved by Weights & Measures Authorities A/D Converters.
for use in Accuracy Class III applications according to • Serial interface RS485A.
OIML R 76. • Connection of up to 63 FAD’s.
The display terminal with 6 digits LED red, 14 mm including Additional Features FDT-B
tactile 6 key keypad is available for remote operation (all • Second communication port RS232C.
weighing functions).
• Alibi memory for 10000 records.
All communication via a bi-directional serial interface.
• Real time clock.
The unit may be used in Master Mode where it may poll up to
Options
63 FAD A/D Converters in a network or in Slave Mode where it
will only display information from a selected FAD. • Mains adapter 230 V AC / 9 V DC, 500 mA.
• RS485A to RS232C converter.
Electronics

Two models are available:

Weighing

• FDT-A with basic functions, • Display terminal bracket.

• FDT-B with additional features: • Front cover IP65.
additional serial interface RS232C, real time clock,
Alibi memory for 10000 records.
E60 Rev1 UK 1(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh
FDT-A / -B Specifications
DISPLAY AND KEYBOARD
Display 6 digits, 7 segments, LED red, 14 mm high
Status annunciators Motion, tare, net, minus sign, zero
Keyboard 6-key membrane, with tactile feedback
Decimal point Between any digit of the display
Weight display digits 5
SCALE CALIBRATION AND FUNCTIONS
Via serial command: Digital corner calibration/Deadload/Span/Scale parameters
Calibration
Calibration may be performed by application of weights or by the mV/V values of each load cell
Weighing functions Auto zero maintenance, motion detection, auto-zero at power-up, zero, tare, gross, test
Memories Serial EEPROM calibration memory
COMMUNICATION
RS485A half duplex, multidrop with networking address, 2400 to 115000 baud
Serial interface
Baudrate, data bits, parity and data output are progammable
ADDITIONAL FEATURES FDT-B
Serial interface RS232C full duplex, 1200 baud; for printer or host computer
Alibi memory and RTC Alibi memory for 10000 records and real time clock
POWER
Power supply 7.5 - 10 V AC or 8 - 12 V DC
Consumption 1.8 W maximum
ENVIRONMENT AND ENCLOSURE
EMC According to OIML R 76 and EN 45501 requirements
Operating temperature –10 °C to +40 °C legal for trade / –20 °C to +50 °C non approved
Storage temperature –10 °C to +70 °C
Humidity 90% RH max, non condensing
Enclosure Panel mount, protection IP 54
OPTIONS
Mains adapter 230 V AC / 9 V DC, 500 mA
Converter RS485A to RS232C converter including power adapter 230 V AC / 9 V DC, 500 mA
Display terminal bracket FDT can be inserted for table top
Front cover Transparent front cover with protection IP65

previous page

Dimensions

144 63
Electronics
Weighing

73

Note:
Panel cut-out 136.5 x 66.5 mm
E60 Rev1 UK 2(2)

Additional space required at back side

depending on connectors used.

All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type FT-01 Weight Indicator

next page

The FT-01 Weight Indicator is a very accurate, versatile, general Important Features
purpose instrument. • Approved for 10000 increments.
The instrument is approved by Weights & Measures Authorities • Single or dual scale interval.
for use in Accuracy Class III applications with up to 10000 • Internal resolution 550000 counts.
increments according to OIML R 76. • Serial interface RS232C.
Large 6 digit LED weight display (red, 20 mm) with weight • Set points (2x) available
status information minus, net, zero, motion, out of range and • Alibi memory for 10000 records.
error.
• Piece counting function.
Tactile 8 keys keyboard for various functions (on/off, sum, piece • Set points (2x) available.
counting, zero, tare, print and other function activation keys).
• Tilt sense input.
Two set points are available. Options
Tilt sense input (inhibits weighing when scale is tilted). • Analogue output, current or voltage.
Electronics
Weighing

The stainless steel housing offers the ideal solution for • Second scale connection with function
industrial applications. Scale 1, Scale 2 or Scale 1+2.
• Second communication port
• Real time clock.
Accessory
• RS485A to RS232C converter
E61 Rev1 UK 1(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh
FT-01 Specifications
ACCURACY
Accuracy Class III
EU Type approved 10000 increments
DISPLAY AND KEYBOARD
Display 6 digits, 7 segments, LED red, 20 mm high
Status annunciators Motion, tare, net, minus sign, zero, piece counting mode
Keyboard 8-key membrane, with tactile feedback
Decimal point Between any digit of the display
Weight display digits 6
A/D CONVERTER
Type Sigma-Delta ratiometric with integral analogue and digital filters
Conversion rate 3 to 70 measurements per second
Minimum input per vsi 0.4 µV per interval legal for trade, 0.1 µV per interval non approved
Analogue input range –0.25 mV/V to 4 mV/V (–1.25 mV to 20 mV)
Resolution Internal 550000 counts, display 100000 per mV/V input
SCALE CALIBRATION AND FUNCTIONS
Calibration Calibration may be performed by application of weights or by the mV/V value of the load cell
Weighing functions Auto zero maintenance, motion detection, auto-zero at power-up, zero, tare, gross, test.
Alibi memory Alibi memory for 10000 records
Set Points 2 Set points, transistor output, optoisolated, 24 V DC, 100 mA
Tilt sense input Inhibits weighing when scale is tilted
LINEARITY AND STABILITY
Linearity Within 0.002 %
Long term stability ≤ 0.005% of full scale per year
Temperature coefficient Zero ≤ 2 ppm/°C (switched polarity), Span ≤ 2 ppm/°C
LOAD CELLS
Excitation +5 V DC or +5 V DC switched polarity
Number of load cells Up to 30 load cells 1100 Ω
Connection 6 wire technique
COMMUNICATION
Port #1 RS232C, 2400 baud
POWER
Power requirements 85...260 V AC, 50/60 Hz, 10 VA
ENVIRONMENT AND ENCLOSURE
previous page EMC According to OIML R 76 and EN 45501 requirements
Operating temperature –10 °C to +40 °C legal for trade / –20 °C to +50 °C non approved
Storage temperature –10 °C to +70 °C
Humidity 90% RH max, non condensing
Enclosure Stainless steel, protection IP 65
OPTIONS
* Analogue output Current or voltage, resolution 16 bit Full Scale (65000 increments)
* Second scale connection With function Scale 1, Scale 2 or Scale 1+2
Real time clock
RS485A or RS232C half duplex, baudrate 2400 to 57600
Second Communication (Port #2) Baudrate, data bits, parity and data output are progammable
(Continious output, remote printer, EDP and master-slave protocols)
ACCESSORY
RS485A to RS232C converter
* Note: These options cannot be combined, select either one or the other

Dimensions
305
252 62
Electronics
Weighing

152
168

* Note:
position of mounting holes (4x).
E61 Rev1 UK 2(2)

Additional space
required at back side
depending on
connectors used.
232* 51*

All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type FT-02 Weight Indicator

next page

Type FT-02 Weight Indicator,

Mains and Battery Operated, in table top
housing

The FT-02 Weight Indicator is a very accurate, versatile, general Important Features
purpose instrument. • Approved for 10000 increments.
The instrument is approved by Weights & Measures Authorities • Single or dual scale interval.
for use in Accuracy Class III applications with up to 10000 • Internal resolution 550000 counts.
increments (e) according to OIML R 76. • Serial interface RS232C.
Large 6 digit LCD weight display (black, 15 mm) with weight • Set points (2x) available
status information minus, net, zero, motion, out of range and • Alibi memory for 10000 records.
error.
• Piece counting function.
Tactile 8 keys keyboard for various functions (on/off, sum, piece • Set points (2x) available.
counting, zero, tare, print and other function activation keys).
• Tilt sense input.
Two set points are available.
Electronics

Options
Weighing

Tilt sense input (inhibits weighing when scale is tilted). • Analogue output, current or voltage.
The stainless steel housing offers the ideal solution for • Second scale connection with function
industrial applications. Scale 1, Scale 2 or Scale 1+2.
The FT-02 is also available as a Mains and Battery Operated • Second communication port RS485A.
instrument, in table top housing. • Real time clock..
Accessory
E62 Rev1 UK 1(2)

• RS485A to RS232C converter

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh
FT-02 Specifications
ACCURACY
Accuracy Class III
EU Type approved 10000 increments
DISPLAY AND KEYBOARD
Display 6 digits, 7 segments, LCD black, 15 mm high
Status annunciators Motion, tare, net, minus sign, zero, piece counting mode
Keyboard 8-key membrane, with tactile feedback
Decimal point Between any digit of the display
Weight display digits 6
A/D CONVERTER
Type Sigma-Delta ratiometric with integral analogue and digital filters
Conversion rate 3 to 70 measurements per second
Minimum input per vsi 0.4 µV per interval legal for trade, 0.1 µV per interval non approved
Analogue input range -0.25 mV/V to 4 mV/V (-1.25 mV to 20 mV)
Resolution Internal 550000 counts, display 100000 per mV/V input
SCALE CALIBRATION AND FUNCTIONS
Calibration Calibration may be performed by application of weights or by the mV/V value of the load cell
Weighing functions Auto zero maintenance, motion detection, auto-zero at power-up, zero, tare, gross, test
Alibi memory Alibi memory for 10000 records
Set Points 2 Set points, transistor output, optoisolated, 24 V DC, 100 mA
Tilt sense input Inhibits weighing when scale is tilted
LINEARITY AND STABILITY
Linearity Within 0.002 %
Long term stability ≤ 0.005% of full scale per year
Temperature coefficient Zero ≤ 2 ppm/°C (switched polarity), Span ≤ 2 ppm/°C
LOAD CELLS
Excitation +5 V DC or +5 V DC switched polarity
Number of load cells Up to 30 load cells 1100 Ω
Connection 6 wire technique
COMMUNICATION
Port #1 RS232C, 2400 baud
POWER
Power requirements 85...260 V AC, 50/60 Hz, 10 VA
ENVIRONMENT AND ENCLOSURE
previous page EMC According to OIML R 76 and EN 45501 requirements
Operating temperature –10 °C to +40 °C legal for trade / –20 °C to +50 °C non approved
Storage temperature –10 °C to +70 °C
Humidity 90% RH max, non condensing
Enclosure Stainless steel, protection IP 65
OPTIONS
* Analogue output Current or voltage, resolution 16 bit Full Scale (65000 increments)
* Second scale connection With function Scale 1, Scale 2 or Scale 1+2
Real time clock
RS485A or RS232C half duplex, baudrate 2400 to 57600
Port #2 Baudrate, data bits, parity and data output are progammable
(Continious output, remote printer, EDP and master-slave protocols)
ACCESSORY
RS485A to RS232C converter
TYPE FT-02 WEIGHT INDICATOR, MAINS AND BATTERY OPERATED, IN TABLE TOP HOUSING
Battery Approx. 35 hours with 4 load cells 1100 Ω
* Note: These options cannot be combined, select either one or the other

Dimensions
Stainless Steel Housing Table Top Housing, powder coated
Electronics
Weighing

305
252 62

194 135

152
100
168
E62 Rev1 UK 2(2)

* Note:
position of mounting holes (4x).

232* 51*

All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type FT-03 Weight Indicator

next page

Type FT-03 Weight Indicator,

Mains and Battery Operated, in table top
housing

The FT-03 Weight Indicator is a very accurate, versatile, general Important Features
purpose instrument. • For standard strain gauge load cells or
It is designed to connect standard strain gauge load cells or Flintec digital load cells.
Flintec digital RC3D load cells (parameter selectable). If digital • Single or dual scale interval.
load cells are connected the A/D conversion is done in the load • Internal resolution 550000 counts.
cells; all scale functions and load cell power supply supported • Alphanumeric keyboard and display.
by the instrument.
• Serial interface RS232C.
The instrument is approved by W&M Authorities for use in • Second communication port RS485A.
Accuracy Class III applications according to OIML R 76.
• Set points (2x) available.
Alphanumeric LCD backlight display (13 mm). • Alibi memory for 10000 records.
Tactile 27 keys including Numeric/Alphanumeric Keyboard for • Real time clock.
Electronics
Weighing

various functions (on/off, sum, piece counting, zero, tare, print • Piece counting function.
and other function activation keys).
• Tilt sense input.
Two set points are available. Options
Additional software for: - First weight memory,
• Analogue output, current or voltage.
- Four codes input.
• Second scale connection with function
Tilt sense input (inhibits weighing when scale is tilted). Scale 1, Scale 2 or Scale 1+2.
E63 Rev1 UK 1(2)

The stainless steel housing offers the ideal solution for

industrial applications.
The FT-03 is also available as a Mains and Battery Operated
instrument, in table top housing.

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh
FT-03 Specifications
LOAD CELL CONNECTION
2 Load cells types can be connected: Standard strain gauge load cells or Flintec digital load cells;
Load cell type
selection by parameter setting.
ACCURACY (for standard load cells)
Accuracy Class III
EU Type approved 10000 increments
DISPLAY AND KEYBOARD
Display Alphanumeric LCD backlight display (13 mm)
Status annunciators Motion, tare, net, minus sign, zero, piece counting mode
Keyboard Tactile keyboard with 27 keys
Decimal point Between any digit of the display
Weight display digits 6
A/D CONVERTER (for standard load cells)
Type Sigma-Delta ratiometric with integral analogue and digital filters
Conversion rate 3 to 70 measurements per second
Minimum input per vsi 0.4 µV per interval legal for trade, 0.1 µV per interval non approved
Analogue input range –0.25 mV/V to 4 mV/V (–1.25 mV to 20 mV)
Resolution Internal 550000 counts, display 100000 per mV/V input
SCALE CALIBRATION AND FUNCTIONS
Calibration may be performed by application of weights or by the mV/V value of the load cell
Calibration
(for standard load cells)
Weighing functions Auto zero maintenance, motion detection, auto-zero at power-up, zero, tare, gross, test
Alibi memory Alibi memory for 10000 records and real time clock
Set Points 2 Set points, transistor output, optoisolated, 24 V DC, 100 mA
Tilt sense input Inhibits weighing when scale is tilted
LINEARITY AND STABILITY (for standard load cells)
Linearity Within 0.002%
Long term stability ≤ 0.005% of full scale per year
Temperature coefficient Zero ≤ 2 ppm/°C (switched polarity), Span ≤ 2 ppm/°C
LOAD CELLS (for standard load cells)
Excitation +5 V DC or +5 V DC switched polarity
Number of load cells Up to 30 load cells 1100 Ω
Connection 6 wire technique
COMMUNICATION
Port #1 RS232C, 2400 baud
previous page RS485A half duplex, baudrate 2400 to 57600
Port #2** Baudrate, data bits, parity and data output are progammable
(Flintec digital load cells / continious output / remote printer / EDP / master-slave protocols)
POWER
Power requirements 85...260 V AC, 50/60 Hz, 10 VA
ENVIRONMENT AND ENCLOSURE
EMC According to OIML R 76 and EN 45501 requirements
Operating temperature –10 °C to +40 °C legal for trade / –20 °C to +50 °C non approved
Storage temperature –10 °C to +70 °C
Humidity 90% RH max, non condensing
Enclosure Stainless steel, protection IP 65
OPTIONS
* Analogue output Current or voltage, resolution 16 bit Full Scale (65000 increments)
* Second scale connection With function Scale 1, Scale 2 or Scale 1+2
** Option for Port #2 RS232C instead of RS485A
TYPE FT-03 WEIGHT INDICATOR, MAINS AND BATTERY OPERATED, IN TABLE TOP HOUSING
Battery Approx. 35 hours with 4 load cells 1100 Ω
* Note: These options cannot be combined, select either one or the other

Dimensions:
Stainless Steel Housing Table Top Housing, powder coated
Electronics
Weighing

305
252 62

206 135

152
100
168
E63 Rev1 UK 2(2)

* Note:
position of mounting holes (4x).

232* 51*

All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type FT-04 Process Indicator

next page

The FT-04 Process Indicator is a very accurate, versatile, panel Important Features
mount instrument. • Approved for 10000 increments.
The instrument is approved by Weights & Measures Authorities • Single or dual scale interval.
for use in Accuracy Class III applications with up to 10000 • Internal resolution 550000 counts.
increments (e) according to OIML R 76. • Serial interface RS232C.
Large 6 digit LED weight display (red, 14 mm) with weight • Set points (2x) available.
status information minus, net, zero, motion, out of range and • Alibi memory for 10000 records.
error.
Option
Tactile 6 keys keyboard for various functions (sum, zero, tare, • Second communication port RS485A and
print and other function activation keys). Analogue output, current or voltage.
Two set points are available. Accessory
• Front cover IP 65.
Electronics
Weighing
E64 Rev1 UK 1(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh
FT-04 Specifications
ACCURACY
Accuracy Class III
EU Type approved 10000 increments
DISPLAY AND KEYBOARD
Display 6 digits, 7 segments, LED red, 14 mm high
Status annunciators Motion, tare, net, minus sign, zero
Keyboard 6-key membrane, with tactile feedback
Decimal point Between any digit of the display
Weight display digits 6
A/D CONVERTER
Type Sigma-Delta ratiometric with integral analogue and digital filters
Conversion rate 3 to 70 measurements per second
Minimum input per vsi 0.4 µV per interval legal for trade, 0.1 µV per interval non approved
Analogue input range –0.25 mV/V to 4 mV/V (–1.25 mV to 20 mV)
Resolution Internal 550000 counts, display 100000 per mV/V input
SCALE CALIBRATION AND FUNCTIONS
Calibration Calibration may be performed by application of weights or by the mV/V value of the load cell
Weighing functions Auto zero maintenance, motion detection, auto-zero at power-up, zero, tare, gross, test
Set Points 2 Set points, transistor output, optoisolated, 24 V DC, 100 mA
Input 24 V, optoisolated.
Alibi memory and RTC Alibi memory for 10000 records and real time clock.
LINEARITY AND STABILITY
Linearity Within 0.002 %
Long term stability ≤ 0.005% of full scale per year
Temperature coefficient Zero ≤ 2 ppm/°C (switched polarity), Span ≤ 2 ppm/°C
LOAD CELLS
Excitation +5 V DC or +5 V DC switched polarity
Number of load cells Up to 30 load cells 1100 Ω
Connection 6 wire technique
COMMUNICATION
Port #1 RS232C, 2400 baud
POWER
Power requirements 24 V DC
ENVIRONMENT AND ENCLOSURE
previous page EMC According to OIML R 76 and EN 45501 requirements
Operating temperature –10 °C to +40 °C legal for trade / –20 °C to +50 °C non approved
Storage temperature –10 °C to +70 °C
Humidity 90% RH max, non condensing
Enclosure Panel mount, protection IP 54
OPTION
Port #2 and RS485A half duplex, baudrate 2400 to 57600
Baudrate, data bits, parity and data output are progammable
(Continious output, remote printer, EDP and master-slave protocols)

Analogue output Current or voltage, resolution 16 bit Full Scale (65000 increments)
ACCESSORY
Front cover IP 65

Dimensions

144 105
Electronics
Weighing

73

Note:
Panel cut-out 136.5 x 66.5 mm
E64 Rev1 UK 2(2)

Additional space required at back side

depending on connectors used.

All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Process Indicator Type DAS 72.1

next page

Process Indicator Type DAS 72.1 Mark II is a fast, accurate, rail Important Features
mounting instrument for static and dynamic weighing • Internal resolution ±260000 counts.
applications. • Max. conversion rate 2400 per second.
DAS 72.1 with 5 digit LED weight display and service display, • Digital filter, programmable.
serial interface, analogue output and 3 digital inputs and • Calibration with weight or in mV/V.
outputs. The digital inputs and outputs are programmable.
• Linearity better than 0.002 %.
Communication via serial interface RS422/485, making it easy • 6 Wire load cell connection.
to connect to PC, PLC and other devices.
• 3 Logic inputs (optoisolated).
Standard weighing functions are available. • 3 Logic outputs (OC, optoisolated).
Software calibration and set up. • Network function by RS422/485.
• Analogue output 0/4...20 mA.
Electronics
Weighing

• Power supply 11...25 V DC.

Options
• Profibus-Gateway.
• CAN-Bus-Gateway.
• Ethernet-Gateway.
E106 Rev2 UK 1(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

DAS 72.1 Mark II Specifications

Linearity < 0,002 %
Excitation 5 V DC, load cells 80-2000 Ohm, 6 wire technique
Analogue input range ±3,2 mV/V (bipolar, for weighing applications and force measurements)
Minimum input per vsi 0.05 µV / d
Resolution Internal ±260000 counts, ±18-Bit-A/D convertor; display max. ±99999 counts
Conversion rate Internal 2400 measurements per second; external up to 600 measurements per second
Digital filter FIR Filter 2.5...19.7 Hz or IIR Filter 0.25...18 Hz; programmable in 8 steps each
Calibration Software calibration and set up
Computer interface RS485 or RS422, full duplex, 9600....115200 Baud; bus capability up to 32 devices (RS485)
Weighing functions zero, gross, tare, net, filter etc.
Analogue output 0/4...20 mA, 14-Bit resolution
10.2 mm LED, green, 5 digits, 3 status LED for nett/motion/sign,
Display
6 status LED for logic inputs and outputs
Logic inputs 3 optoisolated inputs, 10...30 V DC, max. 3.5 mA
Logic outputs 3 optoisolated outputs, < 45 V DC/AC, 1 A
on zero 5 ppm/°K typ.; max. <10 ppm/°K
Temperature effects
on span 4 ppm/°K typ.; max. <8 ppm/°K
Temperature range –10 °C to +50 °C (compensated); –20 °C to +60 °C (storage)
Enclosure tinned steel enclosure, protection IP 40, special housing IP 65 on request
Dimensions 135 x 66 x 19 mm, weight ca. 180 g
Power supply 11...25 V DC ±10 %, < 3 W, galvanically isolated
Options Gateway for Profibus, CAN-Bus or Ethernet
EMC CE 73/23/EEC; 93/98/EEC and 89/336/EEC
All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.

System Configuration

135

previous page FLINTEC Logic input 1 2 3 Digital Amplifier + Setpoint

Inp.1
DAS 72.1 Mark II
Inp.2
Depress 0 T
To
Change
Net
0 T SET UP

Logic output 1 2 3

1.Zero 2.Span 3.Display 4.Filter 5.CLout 6.Input 1/2/3 7.Outp. 1/2/3 8.Datacom.
1.0/allow>0< 1.Set cal. ´n´ 1.o/u limits´n´ 1.fcut Hz 1.4mA=´n´ 1.Assign key 1.SPoint ´n´ 1.Baud rate
2.Calibrate 2.Calibrate 2.Step * ´n´ 2.Algorithm 2.20mA=´n´ 2. 2.Hyst.±´n´ 2.422/485
66 3.Set mV/V 3.Set mV/V 3.Dec.point 3.Update rate 3.Base 3. 3.Base 3.Address
4.Disp.mV/V 4.Logic stats 4.Motion´n´ 4.Test I mA 4.Test 4.Test 4.Auto trnsm.
Isolated Isolated Isolated
Load cell 5Vdc 80mA CL out RS422/485 Logic Outputs Logic Inputs Power 11 -25Vdc
1 2 3 com 1 2 3 com
Exc Sen Inp Inp Sen Exc 0-20mA Rx Rx Tx Tx
+ + + - - - Io Gnd + - + - + + 0 0

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 14 27

Load cells; Analogue output RS422/485 3 digital outputs 3 logic inputs Power supply
6-wire 0/4 - 20 mA interface for (optoisolated, (optoisolated, 11 - 25 V DC
Electronics

connection for PLC/PC connection max. 10...30 V DC) (galvanically isolated)

Weighing

PLC/PC connection or remote display 45V AC/DC /1A)

Inp.1 Inp.2
T
0 T
E106 Rev2 UK 2(2)

Silo Nr.: 1
Netto : 17285 kg
Tara : 1458 kg

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Load Cell Digitizing Unit Type LDU 68.1

next page

LDU 68.1 plugged on adaptor board UA 77.1 (optionally)

The Load Cell Digitizing Unit LDU 68.1 is an accurate, veritable, Important Features
A/D convertor for static and quasi-static weighing applications. • Easy converting analogue load cells to
The instrument is approved by Weights & Measures Authorities digital.
for use in Accuracy Class III applications with up to 5000 • Internal resolution ±130000 counts.
increments (e) according to OIML R 76. • Max. conversion rate 90 per second.
Communication via serial interface RS422/485, making it easy • Digital filter, programmable.
to connect to PC, PLC and other devices. • Linearity better than 0.002 %.
Standard weighing functions are available. • 6 wire load cell connection.
Software calibration and set up. • 2 inputs (opto-isolated).
• 2 outputs (OC).
• Network function by RS422/485.
Electronics
Weighing

• Power supply 12...24 V DC.

Options
• Adaptor board(s) with screw terminals for
mounting on rail.
• Profibus-Gateway.
• CAN-Bus-Gateway.
E99 Rev2 UK 1(2)

• Ethernet-Gateway.

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

LDU 68.1 Specifications

Accuracy Class III
EU Type approved 5000 increments according OIML R 76
Linearity < 0,002 % F.S.
Excitation 5 V DC, load cells 250-2000 Ohm, 6 wire technique
Analogue input range ±2,2 mV/V (bipolar, for weighing applications and force measurements)
Minimum input per vsi 0.1 µV per interval non approved; 0.7 µV per interval legal for trade
Resolution Internal ±130000 counts, ±17-Bit-A/D convertor; external max. ±99999 counts
Conversion rate internal 90 measurements per second; external up to 90 measurements per second
Digital filter 0.02...5 Hz programmable in 8 steps / Bessel Characteristics
Calibration software calibration and set up
Computer interface RS485 or RS422, full duplex, 9600....115200 Baud; bus capability up to 32 devices (RS485)
Weighing functions zero, gross, tare, net, filter etc.
Inputs 2 opto-isolated inputs, 10...30 V DC max. 3 mA
Outputs 2 OC outputs, < 30 V DC, 200 mA
on zero 5 ppm/°K typ.; max. <10 ppm/°K
Temperature effects
on span 3 ppm/°K typ.; max. < 5 ppm/°K
Temperature range –10 °C to +50 °C (compensated); –20 °C to +60 °C (storage)
Enclosure tinned steel enclosure, protection IP 40, special housing IP 65 on request
Dimensions 82 x 31 x 6 mm, weight approx. 30 g; with adaptor board 99 x 41 x 12 mm, approx. 50 g
Power supply 12...24 V DC ±10 %, < 60 mA, not galvanically isolated
Options adaptor board UA73.2 (passive) or UA77.1 (RS422 to RS232) or 3 Gateway versions
EMC / Approvals CE 73/23/EEC; 93/98/EEC and 89/336/EEC / OIML R 76 for 5000 d
All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.

System Configuration

Load cells; PLC

6-wire system
P1 R1 R3
connection Zero Adj. R4
previous page
0 Gnd Load cell Digitizing Unit + Rx 10
RS422/485-interface
1 + Exc LDU 68.1 Rx 11
2 + Sen + Tx 12 for
3 + Sig Tx 13 PLC/PC-connection
4 Sig nmax = 5000 Temp. -15°C/+50°C 0 In 14
5 Sen Certificate no. DK 0199 - R76 - 01.01 0 Out 15
6 Exc 1 In 16 Silo Nr.: 1
7 Gnd
8 NC
9 NC
FLINTEC
www.flintec.net
1 Out 17
+ PWR 18
Gnd 19
Netto
Tara
: 17285 kg
: 1458 kg

P2 Span Adj. F1
Buss
R2 1/4A

LDU 68.1 plugged on adaptor board (optional): Power supply 2 inputs

– UA73.2 1:1 ----------------------- 2 outputs
– UA77.1 converter RS422 / RS232 12...24 V DC
max. 60 mA
(Outline dimension 99 x 41 x 12)

Dimensions
82
3.8 Ø3.3 mm (2x)
Electronics
Weighing

0 Gnd Load cell Digitizing Unit + Rx 10

1 + Exc LDU 68.1 Rx 11
2 + Sen + Tx 12
3 + Sig Tx 13
4 Sig nmax = 5000 Temp. -15°C/+50°C 0 In 14 21.5
31 5 Sen Certificate no. DK 0199 - R76 - 01.01 0 Out 15
6 Exc 1 In 16
7 Gnd
8 NC
9 NC
FLINTEC
www.flintec.net
1 Out 17
+ PWR 18
Gnd 19
E99 Rev2 UK 2(2)

6
10
6
2.5

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Load Cell Digitizing Unit Type LDU 68.2

next page

LDU 68.2 plugged on adaptor board UA 77.1 (optionally)

The Load Cell Digitizing Unit LDU 68.2 is an accurate, veritable, Important Features
A/D convertor for static and quasi-static weighing applications. • Easy converting analogue load cells to
Communication via serial interface RS422/485, making it easy digital.
to connect to PC, PLC and other devices. • Internal resolution ±130000 counts.
Standard weighing functions are available. • Max. conversion rate 90 per second.
Software calibration and set up. • Digital filter, programmable.
• Linearity better than 0.002 %.
• 6 wire load cell connection.
• Network function by RS422/485.
• Power supply 12...24 V DC.
Options
Electronics
Weighing

• Adaptor board(s) with screw terminals for

mounting on rail.
• Profibus-Gateway.
• CAN-Bus-Gateway.
• Ethernet-Gateway.
E101 Rev2 UK 1(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

LDU 68.2 Specifications

Linearity < 0,002 % F.S.
Excitation 5 V DC, load cells 250-2000 Ohm, 6 wire technique
Analogue input range ±2,2 mV/V (bipolar, for weighing applications and force measurements)
Minimum input per vsi 0.1 µV per interval
Resolution Internal ±130000 counts, ±17-Bit-A/D convertor; external max. ±99999 counts
Conversion rate internal 90 measurements per second; external up to 90 measurements per second
Digital filter 0.02...5 Hz ; programmable in 8 steps / Bessel charateristics
Analogue input filter 2.8 Hz (20 dB / dec.)
Calibration software calibration and set up
Computer interface RS485 or RS422, full duplex, 9600....115200 Baud; bus capability up to 32 devices (RS485)
Weighing functions zero, gross, tare, net, filter etc.
on zero 25 ppm/°K typ.; max. <50 ppm/°K
Temperature effects
on span 15 ppm/°K typ.; max. <30 ppm/°K
Temperature range –10 °C to +50 °C (compensated); –20 °C to +60 °C (storage)
Enclosure tinned steel enclosure, protection IP 40, special housing IP 65 on request
Dimensions 82 x 31 x 6 mm, weight approx. 30 g; with adaptor board 99 x 41 x 12 mm, approx. 50 g
Power supply 12...24 V DC ±10 %, < 60 mA, not galvanically isolated
Options adaptor board UA73.2 (passive) or UA77.1 (RS422 to RS232) or 3 Gateway versions
EMC CE 73/23/EEC; 93/98/EEC and 89/336/EEC
All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.

System Configuration

Load cells; PLC

6-wire system
connection P1 R1 R3
Zero Adj. R4
previous page
0 Gnd Load cell Digitizing Unit + Rx 10
RS422/485-interface
1 + Exc LDU 68.2 Rx 11
2 + Sen + Tx 12 for
3 + Sig Tx 13 PLC/PC-connection
4 Sig NC 14
5 Sen NC 15
6 Exc NC 16 Silo Nr.: 1
7 Gnd
8 NC
9 NC
FLINTEC
www.flintec.net
+
NC 17
PWR 18
Gnd 19
Netto
Tara
: 17285 kg
: 1458 kg

P2 Span Adj. F1
Buss
R2 1/4A

LDU 68.2 plugged on adaptor board (optional): Power supply

– UA73.2 1:1 -----------------------
– UA77.1 converter RS422 / RS232 12...24 V DC
max. 60 mA
(Outline dimension 99 x 41 x 12)

Dimensions
82
3.8 Ø3.3 mm (2x)
Electronics
Weighing

0 Gnd Load cell Digitizing Unit + Rx 10

1 + Exc LDU 68.2 Rx 11
2 + Sen + Tx 12
3 + Sig Tx 13
4 Sig NC 14 21.5
31 5 Sen NC 15
6 Exc NC 16
7 Gnd
8 NC
9 NC
FLINTEC
www.flintec.net
+
NC 17
PWR 18
Gnd 19
E101 Rev2 UK 2(2)

6
10
6
2.5

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Load Cell Digitizing Unit Type LDU 69.1

next page

LDU 69.1 plugged on adaptor board UA 77.1 (optionally)

The Load Cell Digitizing Unit LDU 69.1 is an accurate, veritable, Important Features
A/D convertor for static and dynamic weighing applications. • Easy converting analogue load cells to
The instrument is approved by Weights & Measures Authorities digital.
for use in Accuracy Class III applications with up to 10000 • Internal resolution±1 050 000 counts.
increments (e) according to OIML R 76. • Max. conversion rate 172 per second.
Communication via serial interface RS422/485, making it easy • Digital filter, programmable.
to connect to PC, PLC and other devices. • Linearity better than 0.001 %.
Standard weighing functions are available. • Calibration in mV/V possible.
Software calibration and set up. • 6 wire load cell connection.
• Network function by RS422/485.
• Power supply 12...24 V DC.
Electronics
Weighing

Options
• Adaptor board(s) with screw terminals for
mounting on rail.
• Profibus-Gateway.
• CAN-Bus-Gateway.
• Ethernet-Gateway.
E110 Rev2 UK 1(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

LDU 69.1 Specifications

Accuracy Class III
EU Type approved 10 000 increments according OIML R 76
Linearity < 0,001 % F.S.
Excitation 5 V AC, load cells 250-2000 Ohm, 6 wire technique
Analogue input range ±2,2 mV/V (bipolar, for weighing applications and force measurements)
Minimum input per vsi 0.02 µV per interval non approved; 0.1 µV per interval legal for trade
Resolution ±1 050 000 counts, ±20-Bit-A/D convertor; external max. ±99999 counts
Conversion rate 172 measurements per second; external up to 172measurements per second
Digital filter 0.2...3 Hz programmable in 6 steps / Bessel-, Gauss- or Butterworth-characteristics
Calibration software calibration and set up
Computer interface RS485 or RS422, full duplex, 9600....115200 Baud; bus capability up to 32 devices (RS485)
Weighing functions zero, gross, tare, net, filter etc.
on zero 1 ppm/°K typ.; max. <2 ppm/°K
Temperature effects
on span 1 ppm/°K typ.; max. <2 ppm/°K
Temperature range –10 °C to +40 °C (compensated); –20 °C to +60 °C (storage)
Enclosure tinned steel enclosure, protection IP 40, special housing IP 65 on request
Dimensions 82 x 31 x 6 mm, weight approx. 30 g; with adaptor board 99 x 41 x 12 mm, approx. 50 g
Power supply 12...24 V DC ±10 %, < 60 mA, not galvanically isolated
Options adaptor board UA73.2 (passive) or UA77.1 (RS422 to RS232) or 3 Gateway versions
EMC / Approvals CE 73/23/EEC; 93/98/EEC and 89/336/EEC / OIML R 76 for 10000 d
All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.

System Configuration

Load cells; PLC

6-wire system
P1 R1 R3
connection Zero Adj. R4
previous page
0 Gnd Load cell Digitizing Unit + Rx 10
RS422/485-interface
1 + Exc LDU 69.1 Rx 11
2 + Sen + Tx 12 for
3 + Sig Tx 13 PLC/PC-connection
4 Sig nmax = 10000 Temp. -15°C/+50°C NC 14
5 Sen Certificate no. DK 0199 - R76 - 03.01 NC 15
6 Exc NC 16 Silo Nr.: 1
7 Gnd
8 NC
9 NC
FLINTEC
www.flintec.net
+
NC 17
PWR 18
Gnd 19
Netto
Tara
: 17285 kg
: 1458 kg

P2 Span Adj. F1
Buss
R2 1/4A

LDU 69.1 plugged on adaptor board (optional): Power supply

– UA73.2 1:1 -----------------------
– UA77.1 converter RS422 / RS232 12...24 V DC
max. 60 mA
(Outline dimension 99 x 41 x 12)

Dimensions
82
3.8 Ø3.3 mm (2x)
Electronics
Weighing

0 Gnd Load cell Digitizing Unit + Rx 10

1 + Exc LDU 69.1 Rx 11
2 + Sen + Tx 12
3 + Sig Tx 13
4 Sig nmax = 10000 Temp. -15°C/+50°C NC 14 21.5
31 5 Sen Certificate no. DK 0199 - R76 - 03.01 NC 15
6 Exc NC 16
7 Gnd
8 NC
9 NC
FLINTEC
www.flintec.net
+
NC 17
PWR 18
Gnd 19
E110 Rev2 UK 2(2)

6
10
6
2.5

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Load Cell Digitizing Unit Type LDU 78.1

next page

LDU 78.1 plugged on adaptor board UA 77.1 (optionally)

The Load Cell Digitizing Unit LDU 78.1 is an accurate, veritable, Important Features
high speed A/D convertor for static and dynamic weighing • Easy converting analogue load cells to
applications. digital.
The instrument is approved by Weights & Measures Authorities • Internal resolution ±260000 counts.
for use in Accuracy Class III applications with up to 5000 • Max. conversion rate 2400 per second.
increments (e) according to OIML R 76. • Digital filter, programmable.
Communication via serial interface RS422/485, making it easy • Check weigher functions.
to connect to PC, PLC and other devices. • Linearity better than 0.002 %.
Standard weighing functions are available. • 6 wire load cell connection.
Software calibration and set up. • 2 inputs (opto-isolated).
• 2 outputs (OC).
Electronics
Weighing

• Network function by RS422/485.

• Power supply 12...24 V DC.
Options
• Adaptor board(s) with screw terminals for
mounting on rail.
• Profibus-Gateway.
E117 Rev2 UK 1(2)

• CAN-Bus-Gateway.
• Ethernet-Gateway.

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

LDU 78.1 Specifications

Accuracy Class III
EU Type approved 5000 increments according OIML R 76
Linearity < 0,002 % F.S.
Excitation 5 V DC, load cells 250-2000 Ohm, 6 wire technique
Analogue input range ±2,2 mV/V (bipolar, for weighing applications and force measurements)
Minimum input per vsi 0.05 µV per interval non approved; 0.7 µV per interval legal for trade
Resolution Internal ±260000 counts, ±18-Bit-A/D convertor; external max. ±99999 counts
Conversion rate internal 2400 measurements per second; external up to 600 measurements per second
Digital filter FIR Filter 2.5...19.7 Hz or IIR Filter 0.25...18 Hz; programmable in 8 steps each
Calibration software calibration and set up
Computer interface RS485 or RS422, full duplex, 9600....115200 Baud; bus capability up to 32 devices (RS485)
Weighing functions zero, gross, tare, net, filter etc.
Inputs 2 opto-isolated inputs, 10...30 V DC max. 3 mA
Outputs 2 OC outputs, < 30 V DC, 200 mA
on zero 5 ppm/°K typ.; max. <10 ppm/°K
Temperature effects
on span 4 ppm/°K typ.; max. <8 ppm/°K
Temperature range –10 °C to +50 °C (compensated); –20 °C to +60 °C (storage)
Enclosure tinned steel enclosure, protection IP 40, special housing IP 65 on request
Dimensions 82 x 31 x 6 mm, weight approx. 30 g; with adaptor board 99 x 41 x 12 mm, approx. 50 g
Power supply 12...24 V DC ±10 %, < 60 mA, not galvanically isolated
Options adaptor board UA73.2 (passive) or UA77.1 (RS422 to RS232) or 3 Gateway versions
EMC / Approvals CE 73/23/EEC; 93/98/EEC and 89/336/EEC / OIML R 76 for 5000 d
All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.

System Configuration

Load cells; PLC

6-wire system
P1 R1 R3
connection Zero Adj. R4
previous page
0 Gnd Load cell Digitizing Unit + Rx 10
RS422/485-interface
1 + Exc LDU 78.1 Rx 11
2 + Sen + Tx 12 for
3 + Sig Tx 13 PLC/PC-connection
4 Sig nmax = 5000 Temp. -15°C/+50°C 0 In 14
5 Sen Certificate no. DK 0199 - R76 - 02.02 0 Out 15
6 Exc 1 In 16 Silo Nr.: 1
7 Gnd
8 NC
9 NC
FLINTEC
www.flintec.net
1 Out 17
+ PWR 18
Gnd 19
Netto
Tara
: 17285 kg
: 1458 kg

P2 Span Adj. F1
Buss
R2 1/4A

LDU 78.1 plugged on adaptor board (optional): Power supply 2 inputs

– UA73.2 1:1 ----------------------- 2 outputs
– UA77.1 converter RS422 / RS232 12...24 V DC
max. 60 mA
(Outline dimension 99 x 41 x 12)

Dimensions
82
3.8 Ø3.3 mm (2x)
Electronics
Weighing

0 Gnd Load cell Digitizing Unit + Rx 10

1 + Exc LDU 78.1 Rx 11
2 + Sen + Tx 12
3 + Sig Tx 13
4 Sig nmax = 5000 Temp. -15°C/+50°C 0 In 14 21.5
31 5 Sen Certificate no. DK 0199 - R76 - 02.02 0 Out 15
6 Exc 1 In 16
7 Gnd
8 NC
9 NC
FLINTEC
www.flintec.net
1 Out 17
+ PWR 18
Gnd 19
E117 Rev2 UK 2(2)

6
10
6
2.5

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type FAA-24 Analogue Amplifier

next page

The FAA-24 Analogue Amplifier is an accurate, versatile, Important Features

process instrument. • Accuracy 0.0125%.
It offers Independent connection for up to 4 load cells. • Connection for up to 4 load cells.
With analogue output (jumper selectable): • Analogue output, current or voltage.
• Current 0...20 mA / 4...20 mA • Power supply 18...30 V DC.
• Voltage 0...10 V • Stainless steel housing.

The stainless steel housing offers the ideal solution for

industrial applications, protection IP 65.
Electronics
Weighing
E92 Rev1 UK 1(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh
FAA-24 Specifications
ACCURACY AND STABILITY
Accuracy ≤ 0.0125% of full scale
Repeatability ≤ 0.005% of full scale
Thermal stability in range –10 °C to +50 °C ≤ 0.025% of full scale
Warm-up time 10 minutes
SCALE CALIBRATION & ANALOGUE OUTPUT
Current output 0/4 - 20 mA or Voltage output 0 - 10 V
Calibration
Calibration by potentiometer and jumpers (course)
LOAD CELLS
Excitation 10 V DC
Number of load cells 4 load cells 350...1100 Ω
Connection 4 wire technique
POWER
Power requirements 18...30 V DC
ENVIRONMENT
Operating temperature –10 °C to +50 °C
Storage temperature –25 °C to +80 °C
Humidity 90% RH max, non condensing
ENCLOSURE
Box with connection for 4 load cell cables Stainless steel, protection IP 65.

previous page

Dimensions
200

Ø4.5(4x)

105 30
Electronics
Weighing

210
E92 Rev1 UK 2(2)

40

All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Analogue Amplifier Type LAU 63.1

NC 10
+/- Load cell NC 11
0 Gnd Zero 1 Amplifier Unit Gnd 12
1 + Exc input 2 LAU 63.1 ± Vout 13
2 + Sen +/-mV 4 NC 1 4
3 + Sig +1* NC 15
Span as
4 - Sig relative +2* -10ºC/+40ºC NC 1 6
5 - Sen gain 1* +4* NC 17
6 - Exc LP filter 330 + Pwr 18
7 Gnd Hz 33 FLINTEC Gnd 1 9
.net
8 NC 3300 3,3 www.flintec
next page
9 NC

The Analogue Amplifier Type LAU 63.1 is designed for OEM Important Features
applications to connect one strain gauge load cell or sensor. • Load cell excitation 10 V DC for sensors
DIP switch setting for zero, gain and filtering. ≥250 Ohm.
The LAU 63.1 ist a universal amplifier for static and dynamic • Output –10...+10 V.
applications. • For static and dynamic applications.
Analogue output –10...+10 V to connect with PLC and/or PC • Filterung 3.3...3300 Hz.
systems. Fine trimming for zero and gain is not available. • Zero/gain/filter adjustment by DIP switches.
Calibration to be done in PLC and/or PC. • Power supply 12...24 VDC.
Option
• Adaptor board with screw terminals for
mounting on rail.
Electronics
Weighing
E116 Rev2 UK 1(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

LAU 63.1 Specifications

Linearity < 0,01 %
Excitation 10 V DC,for 1 load cell 250...2000 Ohm
Analogue input range –32 mV to +32 mV, ( –3.2 mV/V to +3.2 mV/V)
Voltage output 0 to ±10 Volt / 500 Ohm max.
Zero adjustment (Offset) –7 mV to +7 mV in 1 mV steps
Span adjustment in 8 steps
Input filter 3.3; 33; 330 or 3300 Hz setting by DIP-switches
on zero 50 ppm/°K
Temperature effects
on span 50 ppm/°K
Temperature range –10 °C to +40 °C; storage –20 °C to +50 °C
Enclosure tinned steel enclosure, protection IP 40, special housing IP 65 on request
Dimensions 82 x 31 x 6 mm, weight approx. 26 g; with adaptor board 99 x 41 x 12 mm, approx. 50 g
Power supply 12...24 V DC, max. 70 mA, not galvanically isolated
Option Adaptor board with screw terminals for mounting on rail
EMC CE 73/23/EEC; 93/98/EEC and 89/336/EEC
All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.

System Configuration

Load cells;
6-wire
connection PLC
P1 R1 R3
Zero Adj. R4 system

0 Gnd Zero +/- Load cell NC 10

1+ Exc input 1 Amplifier Unit NC 11
previous page 2+ Sen 2 Gnd 12
+/-mV LAU 63.1 PLC and/or
3+ Sig 4 ± Vout 13
4- Sig Span as +1* NC 14 computer with
5- Sen relative +2* NC 15 analogue input
-10ºC/+40ºC
6- Exc gain 1* +4* NC 16
7 Gnd LP filter 330 NC 17
8 NC Hz 33 FLINTEC +Pwr 18 Silo Nr.: 1
9 NC 3300 3,3 www.flintec.net Gnd 19 Netto : 17285 kg
Tara : 1458 kg

P2 Span Adj. Made in EU F1

Buss
R2 1/4A

LAU 63.1 plugged on adaptor board UA73.2 (optional). Power supply

With screw terminals and mounting on rail. -----------------------
14...24 V DC
(Outline dimensions 99 x 41 x 12) max. 70 mA

Dimensions
82
3,8
Ø3.3 mm (2x)
Electronics
Weighing

0 Gnd +/- Load cell NC 10

Zero
1+ Exc Input 1 Amplifier Unit NC 11
2+ Sen 2 Gnd 12
+/- mV LAU 63.1
3+ Sig 4 ± Vout 13
4- Sig Span as +1* NC 14
31 relative 21,5
5- Sen +2* -10ºC/+40ºC NC 15
6- Exc gain 1* +4* NC 16
7 Gnd LP filter 330 NC 17
8 NC Hz 33 FLINTEC +Pwr 18
9 NC 3300 3,3 www.flintec.net Gnd 19
E116 Rev2 UK 2(2)

6
10

2,5
6

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Analogue Amplifier Type LAU 73.1

NC 10
1 Load cell NC 11
0 Gnd Zero 2 Amplifier Unit Gnd 12
1 + Exc input 4 LAU 73.1 I out 13
2 + Sen mV 8 NC 14
3 + Sig Span as +1* NC 15
4 - Sig relative +2* -10ºC/+40ºC NC 16
5 - Sen gain 1* +4* NC 17
6 - Exc LP filter 3,3 + Pwr 1 8
7 Gnd 0,33 FLINTEC Gnd 19
Hz 330 .net
8 NC 4/0 www.flintec
next page Out mA
9 NC

The Analogue Amplifier Type LAU 73.1 is designed for OEM Important Features
applications to connect one strain gauge load cell or sensor. • Load cell excitation 10 V DC for sensors
DIP switch setting for zero, gain and filtering. ≥250 Ohm.
The LAU 73.1 is a universal amplifier for static / semi-static • Output 0/4 ... 20 mA.
applications. • Filterung 0,33 ... 33 Hz.
Analogue output 0/4... 20 mA to connect with PLC and/or PC • Zero/gain/filter adjustment by DIP switches.
systems. Fine trimming for zero and gain is not available. • Power supply 12...24 VDC.
Calibration to be done in PLC and/or PC. Option
• Adaptor board with screw terminals for
mounting on rail and
0-10 V analogue output with fine trimming
Electronics

potentiometers.
Weighing
E111 Rev2 UK 1(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

LAU 73.1 Specifications

Linearity < 0,01 %
Excitation 10 V DC,for 1 load cell 250...2000 Ohm, 4 wire technique
Analogue input range –2 mV to +23 mV, ( –0.2 mV/V to +2,3 mV/V)
Current output 0 - 20 mA or 4 - 20 mA / 500 Ohm max.
Zero adjustment (Offset) 0 mV/V to +1,5 mV/V in 0,1 mV/V steps
Span adjustment in 8 steps
Input filter 0,33; 3,3; 33 Hz setting by DIP-switches
on zero 50 ppm/°K
Temperature effects
on span 50 ppm/°K
Temperature range –10 °C to +40 °C; storage –20 °C to +50 °C
Enclosure tinned steel enclosure, protection IP 40, special housing IP 65 on request
Dimensions 82 x 31 x 6 mm, weight approx. 30 g; with adaptor board 99 x 41 x 12 mm, approx. 50 g
Power supply 12...24 V DC, max. 80 mA, not galvanically isolated
Adaptor board with screw terminals for mounting on rail and
Option
0-10 V analogue output with fine trimming potentiometers
EMC CE 73/23/EEC; 93/98/EEC and 89/336/EEC
All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.

System Configuration

Load cells;
6-wire
connection PLC
P1 R1 R3
Zero Adj. R4 system

0 Gnd Zero 1 Load cell NC 10

1+ Exc input 2 Amplifier Unit NC 11
2+ Sen mV 4 LAU 73.1 Gnd 12 PLC and/or
3+ Sig 8 Iout 13
4- Sig Span as +1* NC 14 computer with
5- Sen relative +2* -10ºC/+40ºC NC 15 analogue input
6- Exc gain 1* +4* NC 16
7 Gnd LP filter 3,3 NC 17
8 NC Hz 330 0,33 FLINTEC +Pwr 18 Silo Nr.: 1
9 NC Out mA 4/0 www.flintec.net Gnd 19 Netto : 17285 kg
previous page Tara : 1458 kg

P2 Span Adj. Made in EU F1

Buss
R2 1/4A

LAU 73.1 plugged on adaptor board UA73.2 (optional). Power supply

With screw terminals and mounting on rail. -----------------------
Includes 0-10 V analogue output. 12...24 V DC
max. 80 mA
(Outline dimensions 99 x 41 x 12)

Dimensions
82
3.8 Ø3.3 mm (2x)

0 Gnd Zero 1 Load cell NC 10

1+ Exc input 2 Amplifier Unit NC 11
2+ Sen mV 4 LAU 73.1 Gnd 12
3+ Sig 8 Iout 13
4- Sig Span as +1* NC 14
31 21.5
Electronics

relative
Weighing

5- Sen +2* -10ºC/+40ºC NC 15

6- Exc gain 1* +4* NC 16
7 Gnd LP filter 3,3 NC 17
8 NC Hz 330 0,33 FLINTEC +Pwr 18
9 NC Out mA 4/0 www.flintec.net Gnd 19

6
10
6
E111 Rev2 UK 2(2)

2.5

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Analogue Amplifier Type LAC 65.1

Overflow -/+
5
10
20
40
80
160
320
0-3
2,5
5
10
20
40
-/+

1-2
2
4
8
16
32
0-20/4-20 mA
Int.PWR.ON

OFF

ON t (ms) % of FS-in Rel.Gain(x)

L-P-FILTER SET ZERO SET SPAN

FLINTEC LAC 65.1

Galvanically isolated
1A

SUPPLY PWR. Load Cells OUTPUTS

12-24 VDC 3W VEX 2,5V 425Hz <60mA +/-10V 20mA
next page Exc Sen Sig Sig Sen Exc
+ + 0 0 + + + - - - Vo Io

The Analogue Amplifier LAC 65.1 is a universal amplifier for Important Features
static / semistatic strain gauge applications. • Load cell excitation 2.5 V AC, 425 HZ,
Settings for zero, gain and filtering is done by DIP-switches. for 1 to 4 load cells.
In addition fine trimming for zero and gain by potentiometers. • 6 Wire load cell connection.
The analogue output is available as voltage output • Analogue output 0/4...20 mA and -10...10 V.
(-10...+10 V) and current output (0/4...20 mA. • Input filtering 0,5...32 Hz.
Overflow control, status signal by 2 LED’s. • Zero/gain adjustment by DIP switches and
Cable failure detection. fine trimming potentiometer.
• Overflow control, LED display.
• Cable failure detection.
• Power supply 12...24 V DC.
Electronics
Weighing

• Standard 35 mm DIN-rail mounting.

E82 Rev1 UK 1(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

LAC 65.1 Specifications

Linearity < 0,01 %
Analogue input range ± 0,17 mV/V to 3,3 mV/V, gain adjustment by DIP switches and fine trimming potentiometer
2.5 V AC 425 Hz, for 1-4 load cells 350 Ohm
Excitation
active sensing for cable length up to 100 m
Zero adjustment (Offset) ±80 %, zero adjustment by DIP switches and fine trimming potentiometer
Current output 0 - 20 mA or 4 - 20 mA, Rload ≥ 500 Ohm
Voltage output ±10 V, Rload ≥ 500 Ohm
Active filterung 40 dB / decade 0.25; 0,5; 1; 2; 4; 8; 16; 32 Hz selectable
Temperature range –20 °C to +50 °C, storage –20 °C to +60 °C
on zero 30 ppm/°K
Temperature effects
on span 15 ppm/°K
Housing 135 x 66 x 18 mm, protection IP40, for standard 35 mm DIN-rail mounting
Power supply 12 ... 24 V DC +10 / –15%, C, 3 W max., galvanically separated
All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.

System Configuration

Overflow -/+
5
10
20
40
80
160
320
0-3
2,5
5
10
20
40
+/-

1-2
2
4
8
16
32
0-20/4-20 mA
Int.PWR.ON

OFF

ON t (ms) % of FS-in Rel.Gain(x)

L-P-FILTER SET ZERO SET SPAN

previous page

FLINTEC LAC 65.1

Galvanically isolated
1A

SUPPLY PWR. Load Cells OUTPUTS

12-24 VDC 3W VEX 2,5V 425Hz <60mA +/-10V 20mA
Exc Sen Sig Sig Sen Exc
+ + 0 0 + + + - - - Vo Io

PLC and/or
computer with
analogue input
Electronics

Silo Nr.: 1
Weighing

Netto : 17285 kg
Power supply Tara : 1458 kg
----------------------- Load cells;
12...24 V DC PLC
6-wire
system
connection
E82 Rev1 UK 2(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Analogue Amplifier Type LAC 74.1

20mA/10V
1
Fine adj.

Fine adj.
0 0

20 4,0
40 8,0

13 4,0
7 8,0
2,5 0,5

80 16,0

40 0,5

4 16,0

500 0,33
10 2,0
5 1,0

20 2,0
30 1,0

16 10
50 3,3
5 33
50 0,25
60 1,0
Relative

Pwr. OK
Off IN mV
f CUT

0-20/4-20
Pol. +/-

In range.
gain *

Under

Error
Over
% at

160
Resolu.
On 2mV/V * 1000 n ms
SET ZERO Pot ccw = calib. SET SPAN Pot ccw = calib. SET FILTER OUTPUT CND

FLINTEC LAC 74.1

LOAD CELLS 10Vdc 100mA Out Log Err. PWR
Exc Sen Inp Inp Sen Exc 20mA/ 12-24Vdc

+ + + _ _ _
U
10V
Gnd I/V Gnd C + GND

next page

The Analogue Amplifier Type LAC 74.1 is a universal amplifier Important Features
for static / semi-static weighing applications. • Load cell excitation 10 V DC for
DIP switch setting for zero, gain and filtering. 1 to 4 load cells.
Fine adjustment for zero and gain by 20 turn potentiometer. • 6 Wire load cell connection.
Analogue output available (short-circuit proof): • Analogue output 0/4...20 mA or 0...10 V
selectable.
• Voltage 0...10 V or
• Input filtering 0,33...33 Hz.
• Current 0...20 mA or 4...20 mA
• Zero/gain adjustment by DIP switches and
Safety circuit with logic output, normally closed OC, opens in fine trimming potentiometer.
case of error (including LED display):
• Safety circuit with logic output including
• Load cell cable failure LED display.
Electronics

• The current or voltage output is out of range • Power supply 12...30 V DC or 12...18 V AC.
Weighing

• Power fail • Standard 35 mm DIN-rail mounting.

E107 Rev1 UK 1(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

LAC 74.1 Specifications

Linearity < 0,01 %
Analogue input range ±0,1 mV/V to 3,5 mV/V, gain adjustment by DIP switches and fine trimming potentiometer
Excitation 10 V DC, for 1 to 4 load cells 350 Ohm, 6 wire technique
Logic output, Open Collector, normally closed, opens in case of error (max. 30 V DC, 300 mA):
- Load cell input- or sense wires is out of range
Safety circuit
- The current or voltage output is out of range
- Power fail
Zero adjustment (Offset) ±3 mV/V, zero adjustment by DIP switches and fine trimming potentiometer
Current output 0 - 20 mA or 4 - 20 mA; RLoad ≥ 500 Ohm
Voltage output 0 - 10 V; RLoad ≥ 500 Ohm
Input filters 0,33...33 Hz, DIP switch selectable (5 steps)
Temperature range –20 °C to +50 °C; –20 °C to +60 °C (storage)
on zero 25 ppm/°K
Temperature effects
on span 50 ppm/°K
135 x 66 x 18 mm, protection IP40, for standard 35 mm DIN-rail mounting,
Enclosure
(special housing on request)
Power supply 12...30 V DC ±10% or 12...18 V AC, 3 W max., reversed polarity and excess voltage protected
All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.

System Configuration

20mA/10V
1
Fine adj.

Fine adj.
0 0

20 4,0
40 8,0

13 4,0
7 8,0
2,5 0,5

80 16,0

40 0,5

4 16,0

500 0,33
10 2,0
5 1,0

20 2,0
30 1,0

16 10
50 3,3
5 33
50 0,25
60 1,0

Off Relative

Pwr. OK
IN mV
f CUT

0-20/4-20
Pol. +/-

In range.
gain *

Under

Error
Over
% at

160
Resolu.
On 2mV/V * 1000 n ms
SET ZERO Pot ccw = calib. SET SPAN Pot ccw = calib. SET FILTER OUTPUT CND

FLINTEC LAC 74.1

previous page LOAD CELLS 10Vdc 100mA Out Log Err. PWR
Exc Sen Inp Inp Sen Exc 20mA/ U 12-24Vdc

+ + + _ _ _
10V
Gnd I/V Gnd C + GND

Open Collector output,

normally closed,
opens in case of
PLC and/or
LAC 74.1 error
computer with
analogue input
Silo Nr.: 1
Netto : 17285 kg
Power supply
Load cells; Tara : 1458 kg -----------------------
6-wire PLC 12...24 V DC
connection system 14...28 V AC
Electronics
Weighing
E107 Rev1 UK 2(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type FRD-57 Remote Display

next page

The FRD-57 is a wall mount display terminal to be used in Important Features

combination with various weighing systems. • 6 bright, LED, high visibility digits.
The display terminal has high visible 57 mm large red LED’s. • Serial interface RS485, RS232 or
Communication via a bi-directional serial interface. 20mA current loop (selectable).
• Low power consumption.
Serial interface RS232 or RS485 or 20 mA current loop (only one
interface may be active at the same time)
The FRD-57 is available in a stainless steel housing.
Electronics
Weighing
E88 Rev1 UK 1(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh
FRD-57 Specifications
DISPLAY
Display 6 digits, 7 segments, LED red, 57 mm high
Decimal point Between any digit of the display
Weight display digits Plus/minus sign and 5 digits
Memories Serial EEPROM calibration memory
COMMUNICATION
Serial interface RS232 or RS485 or 20 mA current loop
Serial interface Baudrate DIP switch selectable: 1200, 2400, 9600 and 19600 baud
Data bits DIP switch selectable
POWER
Power supply 230 V AC ± 20%, 50...60 Hz
Consumption 7 W maximum
ENVIRONMENT AND ENCLOSURE
Operating temperature –20 °C to +50 °C
Storage temperature –10 °C to +70 °C
Humidity 90% RH max, non condensing
Stainless steel housing.
Enclosure Protection IP 65
Dimensions: 365 x 130 x 82 mm

All dimensions in mm. Dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice.

previous page

Electronics
Weighing
E88 Rev1 UK 2(2)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

summary

Miscellaneous

data sheet data sheet

Cable Load Cell Tester
Resistors
Dummy Load Cells

price list price list

Miscellaneous

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Cables
• Load cell cable for all Flintec load cells up to 22.5 t (4 conductor, shielded).
• Load cell cable for all Flintec load cells 30 t and up (4 conductor, shielded).
• Measuring cable 6 x 0.5 mm², shielded, diameter 7.1 mm, grey.
• Measuring cable 6 x 0.75 mm², shielded, diameter 8.5 mm, grey.
• Measuring cable 7 x 1 mm², shielded, diameter 9.2 mm, blue, for EEx-Installations.

Cable Replacement Kits for 4 load cells

Including confectioned cable, rubber grommet, shrinking tube and potting material.
• 3 m cable length for SB4, SB5, UB1, UB6, PC6, PCB.
• 4.5 m cable length for SB4, SB5, UB1, UB6, PC6, PCB.
• 12 m cable length for SB4, SB5, UB1, UB6, PC6, PCB, RC3-7.5 t…22.5 t.
• 12 m cable length for RC1-250 kN.
• 18 m cable length for RC1, RC3-30 t and up.

Ground Cables
• Length 150 mm, 5 mm² (SB6).
• Length 150 mm, 10 mm² (SLB/SB14 and SB4/SB5 up to 20 kN).
• Length 180 mm, 10 mm² (SB4/SB5 50 kN and RC3-7.5 t...22.5 t).
• Length 200 mm, 10 mm² (SB4/SB5-100 kN).
• Length 220 mm, 16 mm² (RC3-30 t…50 t).
• Length 270 mm, 16 mm² (RC1-250 kN).
• Length 320 mm, 16 mm² (RC1-400 kN…900 kN).

Resistors for corner trimming

• 50 ppm, set with 14 values 0.22 Ohm…4.7 Ohm, 10 pieces each.

Dummy Load Cells

• For SB6 load cells; 200 N to 2 kN.
• For SLB/SB14 load cells; 200 lb to 5 klb.
• For SB4/SB5 load cells; 5 kN to 20 kN.
• For SB4/SB5 load cells; 50 kN.
• For SB4/SB5 load cells; 100 kN.
• For RC3 load cells; 7.5 t to 50 t.

Miscellaneous
E76 Rev1 UK 1(1)

Product Catalogue 05
 FLINTEC ...the right weigh

back

Type LCT-01 Load Cell Tester

The Load Cell Tester Type LCT-01 is a hand-held, easy-to-use device for load cell testing and error detection in load
cell weighing systems.
The load cell can be tested without being removed from the weighing system.
The operation is menu driven. The test is completely automatic, the test results are available on the display.
The following characteristics are measured:
Input Resistance, Output Resistance and Insulation Resistance (≥10 M Ohm) as well as the Zero Balance of the
load cell with indication of the actual load in % of Maximum Capacity.
For all technicians in the weighing- and/or process industry the LCT-01 is a very important device. Miscellaneous
E57 Rev1 UK 1(1)

Product Catalogue 05
 Delivery Conditions Load Cells and Accessories

back

Prices: Currency €
All prices ex works Meckesheim, Germany
inclusive packing

Discounts: Resales discount and quantity discount on request.

Payment: 30 days net.

Warranty: 24 months on delivered parts from delivery date, according to

paragraph 8 of our General Terms and Conditions of Business;
text available as part of this electronic document.

Our General Terms and Conditions of Business apply for all shipments;
text available as part of this electronic document.

Alterations reserved without notice.

www.flintec.net PL2005-0
Our General Terms and Conditions of Business will be available in English language on request

back
Allgemeine Geschäftsbedingungen
der Flintec GmbH, Bemannsbruch 9, D-74909 Meckesheim

1. Geltung dieser Bedingungen

(a) Die nachstehenden Bedingungen gelten unter Ausschluss aller abweichenden Geschäftsbedingungen des Bestel-
lers für die Geschäftsbeziehungen zwischen uns und dem Besteller, insbesondere für alle gegenwärtigen und zu-
künftigen Lieferungen an den Besteller. Aufgrund von formularmäßigen Einkaufsbedingungen erteilte Aufträge gel-
ten auch dann, wenn wir diese nicht ausdrücklich ablehnen, stets als zu unseren Verkaufsbedingungen zustande
gekommen.
(b) Sind unsere Geschäftsbedingungen dem Besteller bereits bekannt, gelten sie auch ohne neue Bekanntgabe für
künftige Geschäfte. Die Entgegennahme unserer Lieferungen oder Leistungen gilt als Anerkennung unserer Bedin-
gungen.
(c) Durch Erteilung eines Auftrages erkennt der Besteller die alleinige Gültigkeit unserer Geschäftsbedingungen aus-
drücklich an. Abreden, die diese Bedingungen ändern oder ergänzen, Nebenabreden sowie Bedingungen des Be-
stellers sind nur wirksam, wenn sie von uns schriftlich bestätigt werden. Zur Abgabe verbindlicher Erklärungen sind
unsere Handelsvertreter und Handlungsreisenden nicht befugt.

2. Angebot und Vertragsabschluss

(a) Angebote sind freibleibend, insbesondere hinsichtlich der Preise und Liefermöglichkeiten.
(b) Zu dem Angebot gehörende Unterlagen dienen nur der Orientierung des Bestellers, sie sind nicht als Beschaffen-
heitsvereinbarung oder Übernahme einer Beschaffenheitsgarantie bezüglich der beschriebenen Ware bzw. Leis-
tung anzusehen und dürfen nicht an Dritte weitergegeben werden. An Kostenvoranschlägen, Bezeichnungen und
anderen Unterlagen (im Folgenden: Unterlagen) behalten wir uns die eigentums- und urheberrechtlichen Verwer-
tungsrechte uneingeschränkt vor. Die Unterlagen dürfen nur nach unserer vorherigen Zustimmung Dritten zugäng-
next page lich gemacht werden und sind, wenn uns der Auftrag nicht erteilt wird, auf unser Verlangen hin unverzüglich zu-
rückzugeben.
(c) Abbildungen, Aufzeichnung, Gewichts- und Leistungsangaben in Angeboten und Angebotsunterlagen sind nicht
verbindlich, sondern nur als Näherungswerte zur Orientierung des Bestellers zu verstehen, soweit sie nicht aus-
drücklich als verbindlich bezeichnet werden.
(d) Kostenvoranschläge für Instandsetzungen und Einbauten werden gewissenhaft und möglichst genau aufgestellt,
sie sind jedoch unverbindlich.
(e) Bestellungen werden von uns durch schriftliche Auftragsbestätigung angenommen. Ausschließlich der schriftliche
Inhalt dieser Auftragsbestätigung ist für das Vertragsverhältnis und den Lieferumfang maßgebend und rechtsver-
bindlich, Nebenabsprachen und mündliche Erklärungen von Angestellten oder Vertretern bedürfen zu ihrer Wirk-
samkeit der schriftlichen Aufnahme in die o. g. Auftragsbestätigung. Im übrigen gelten Bestellungen als angenom-
men, wenn wir die Bestellung ausgeführt haben.

3. Preise und Zahlung

(a) Alle Preise verstehen sich in EURO ohne Mehrwertsteuer (netto), es sei denn, abweichende Angaben finden sich
explizit im Angebot. Die Preise gelten ab Lager Meckesheim inklusive Verpackung.
(b) Bei Fakturierung werden wir die gesetzliche Mehrwertsteuer nach ihrem jeweils gültigen Satz zusätzlich in Rech-
nung stellen und ausweisen, es sei denn, die Lieferung ist nach deutschem Steuerrecht nicht mehrwertsteuerpflich-
tig.
(c) Soweit sich zwischen Auftragserteilung und Lieferung Preisfaktoren (z. B. Zoll, gesetzliche Mehrwertsteuer, etc..)
durch behördliche Anordnung erhöhen, sind wir berechtigt, eine Preisanpassung vorzunehmen. Ansonsten werden
wir innerhalb der ersten sechs Wochen seit Vertragsschluss keine Preiserhöhungen vornehmen. Nach diesem Zeit-
raum behalten wir uns vor, die Preise gemäß § 315 BGB anzupassen.
(d) Alle Rechnungen sind dreißig Tage nach Rechnungsdatum ohne Abzüge zu zahlen, sofern keine abweichenden
Vereinbarungen bestehen.
(e) Der Besteller ist zur Zurückbehaltung von Zahlungen wegen Gegenansprüchen, bzw. zur Vornahme einer Aufrech-
nung nicht berechtigt, wenn nicht seine Gegenansprüche auf dem konkreten Vertragsverhältnis beruhen, es sei
denn die dem Zurückbehaltungsrecht zugrundeliegenden oder zur Aufrechnung gestellten Gegenansprüche sind
unbestritten, bzw. rechtskräftig festgestellt.
(f) Wenn nach vorheriger Vereinbarung Wechsel übernommen werden, so werden diese nur erfüllungshalber ange-
nommen. Diskont- und Wechselspesen zzgl. Umsatzsteuer nach Maßgabe der Privatbanksätze gehen zu Lasten
des Bestellers.
(g) Bei Überschreitung von Zahlungszielen sind wir berechtigt, den gesetzlichen Verzugszinsschaden, bezogen auf
den Rechnungsbetrag, geltend zu machen, es sei denn, wir weisen einen höheren oder der Besteller einen niedri-
geren Verzugsschaden nach.
(h) Der Eintritt einer wesentlichen Verschlechterung der Vermögensverhältnisse des Bestellers oder sonstiger Um-
stände, welche seine Kreditwürdigkeit erheblich beeinträchtigen, haben die sofortige Fälligkeit aller unserer Forde-
rungen zur Folge, auch wenn uns der Besteller Wechsel zur Verfügung gestellt hat. In diesen Fällen sind wir au-
ßerdem berechtigt, nur noch nach Bezahlung der fälligen Forderungen, gegen Vorauszahlung oder gegen Sicher-
heitsleistung zu leisten und nach erfolgloser Aufforderung hierzu vom Vertrag zurückzutreten. Verstößt der Bestel-
ler fortgesetzt oder in erheblicher Weise gegen die Zahlungsbedingungen, sind wir berechtigt, nach erfolglosem Ab-
lauf einer angemessenen Zahlungsfrist Schadensersatz statt der Leistung zu verlangen. Die Haftung des Bestellers
für Verzugsschäden bleibt hiervon unberührt.
(i) Erfüllungsort für die Zahlungen ist Meckesheim. Die Regelung des § 270 Abs. 1 BGB bleibt hiervon unberührt.
 2
(j) Handelsvertreter und Handlungsreisende haben keine Befugnis zu Inkasso- und Stundungsabreden.
(k) Für die Preisberechnung sind die von uns ermittelten Leistungen, Stückzahlen und Mengen maßgebend, wenn der
Besteller nicht unverzüglich widerspricht.

4. Lieferung und Lieferzeit, Versand, Gefahrübergang

(a) Wenn nicht ausdrücklich etwas Abweichendes vereinbart wird, erfolgt die Lieferung ab unserem Auslieferungslager
Meckesheim.
(b) Im Falle der vereinbarten Abholung geht die Gefahr des zufälligen Untergangs und der zufälligen Verschlechterung
von Lieferungsgegenständen mit der Mitteilung der Bereitstellung auf den Besteller über. Im übrigen geht die Ge-
fahr in dem Zeitpunkt auf den Besteller über, in welchem die Ware von uns dem Frachtführer übergeben wird.
(c) Holt der Besteller die Ware nicht an unserem Lager ab, sondern wünscht eine Versendung, so erfolgen sämtliche
Lieferungen ausschließlich auf Rechnung und Gefahr des Bestellers. Verpackung wird grundsätzlich nicht zurück-
genommen, soweit wir zur Entsorgung von Verpackungen aufgrund gesetzlicher Vorgaben verpflichtet sind, erfolgt
dies durch von uns auf Verlangen des Bestellers benannte Dritte. Versandart und Versandweg werden von uns
gewählt. Mehrkosten durch abweichende Wünsche des Bestellers gehen zu seinen Lasten. Ist keine bestimmte
Versandart vereinbart, so werden die Produkte auf dem günstigst erscheinenden Weg verschickt, jedoch ohne Ge-
währ für sicherste, billigste und schnellste Beförderung.
(d) Erfolgt auf Wunsch des Bestellers eine Versendung, so sind wir berechtigt, die Sendungen für Rechnung des Kun-
den zu versichern. Wurde eine Versicherung vorgenommen, so werden wir im Schadensfalle die Ansprüche aus
der Versicherung an den Besteller abtreten, sobald dieser die entsprechende Versicherungsprämie an uns entrich-
tet hat.
(e) Verzögert sich der Versand durch Umstände, die der Besteller zu vertreten hat, geht jede Gefahr vom Tag der An-
zeige der Versandbereitschaft an auf den Besteller über.
(f) Sollte der Besteller bei Versandbereitschaft die Liefergegenstände nicht sofort abnehmen, lagern wir sie nach Mög-
lichkeit für ihn auf seine Gefahr. Diese Lagerung entbindet den Besteller nicht von seiner Zahlungsverpflichtung, die
mit dem Zeitpunkt der Bereitstellung eintritt. Zudem sind wir berechtigt, nach Anzeige der Versandbereitschaft ab
dem dritten Monat Lagergeld in Höhe von 1 % des Rechnungsbetrages pro angefangenen Monat zu berechnen,
wenn die Ware durch den Besteller nicht abgeholt wird oder sich der Versand der Produkte auf Wunsch des Bestel-
next page lers um mehr als zwei Monate verzögert. Das Lagergeld wird insgesamt auf 10 % des Rechnungsbetrages be-
grenzt, es sei denn, dass wir höhere Kosten im Einzelfall nachweisen.
(g) Die angegebene Lieferzeit gilt grundsätzlich nur als annähernd. Werden wir an der rechtzeitigen Lieferung durch
unvorhersehbare oder unverschuldete Ereignisse gehindert, die bei zumutbarer Sorgfalt unabwendbar sind, verlän-
gert sich die Lieferzeit angemessen.
(h) Die Lieferzeit beginnt mit der Absendung der Auftragsbestätigung, jedoch nicht vor Eingang einer vereinbarten
Vorauszahlung, nicht vor Klärung aller technischen Einzelheiten und nicht, bevor der Besteller alle ihm obliegenden
previous page Voraussetzungen für die Durchführung des Geschäftes erfüllt hat. Insbesondere beginnt die Lieferfrist nicht, bevor
etwaige vom Besteller bereitzustellende Unterlagen vollständig zu unserer Verfügung stehen. Erfüllt der Besteller
seine Obliegenheiten erst verspätet, so verlängert sich die Lieferzeit entsprechend. Der Zeitraum, welcher zwi-
schen Absendung der Auftragsbestätigung und der Erfüllung der Obliegenheiten des Bestellers liegt, wird als Ver-
längerung der ursprünglich veranschlagten Lieferfrist hinzugerechnet. Liefertermine werden entsprechend verscho-
ben.
(i) Die Lieferzeit gilt als eingehalten, wenn bis zu ihrem Ablauf der Liefergegenstand das Werk verlassen hat oder die
Versandbereitschaft mitgeteilt ist.
(j) Dem Besteller zumutbare Teillieferungen sind zulässig.
(k) Der Besteller ist verpflichtet, den Liefergegenstand auf unseren Wunsch hin unverzüglich nach dessen Lieferung
förmlich abzunehmen und diese Abnahme schriftlich zu bestätigen, es sei denn, der Abnahme stehen konkret dar-
stellbare Mängel am Liefergegenstand entgegen.
(l) Nimmt der Besteller die Ware nicht ab, so sind wir berechtigt, nach erfolglosem Ablauf einer gesetzten Frist zur Ab-
nahme von sieben Tagen vom Vertrag zurückzutreten und daneben Ersatz vergeblicher Aufwendungen zu verlan-
gen.
(m) Werden wir an der Erfüllung unserer Verpflichtungen durch den Eintritt von unvorhersehbaren Umständen gehindert,
welche trotz der nach den Umständen des Falles zumutbaren Sorgfalt nicht abgewendet werden konnten, unabhän-
gig davon, ob diese Umstände bei uns selbst oder unseren Zulieferanten eintreten, so sind wir berechtigt, vom Ver-
trag zurückzutreten. Wird durch die genannten Umstände die Lieferung oder Leistung bei uns unmöglich, so werden
wir von unserer Lieferverpflichtung und allen damit zusammenhängenden sonstigen Verpflichtungen frei. Wir wer-
den den Besteller unverzüglich über den Eintritt solcher Ereignisse unterrichten. Nach einem o. g. Vertragsrücktritt
ist ein Schadenersatzanspruch des Bestellers aufgrund der nicht erfolgten Lieferung oder nicht vorgenommenen
Leistung grundsätzlich ausgeschlossen, es sei denn der Anspruch beruht auf einem groben Verschulden unserer-
seits, bzw. durch unsere Erfüllungsgehilfen, oder auf der Verletzung von Leben, Körper und Gesundheit.
(n) Befinden wir uns im Verzug, so kann der Besteller erst dann vom Vertrag zurücktreten, wenn eine von ihm gesetzte
angemessene Nachfrist fruchtlos verstrichen ist. Schadensersatzansprüche wegen Nichterfüllung bzw. aus dem
Gesichtspunkt der Verletzung von Nebenpflichten sowie die Geltendmachung sonstiger Rechte im Zusammenhang
mit Lieferverzögerungen stehen dem Besteller nicht zu, es sei denn, die Verzögerung wurde durch ein grobes Ver-
schulden unsererseits verursacht.
(o) Die vorgenannten Bestimmungen gelten für den Fall entsprechend, dass ein vereinbarter Installationstermin von uns
nicht eingehalten werden kann.

5. Eigentumsvorbehalt
(a) Wir behalten uns das Eigentum am Liefergegenstand bis zur Erfüllung aller gegenwärtigen und künftigen Ansprüche
aus der laufenden Geschäftsverbindung mit dem Besteller vor. Der Eigentumsvorbehalt bleibt auch dann bestehen,
wenn einzelne Forderungen in laufende Rechnungen aufgenommen sind und der Saldo gezogen und anerkannt ist.
 3
Kaufpreisforderungen geltend trotz Zahlung solange als nicht erloschen, als eine von uns in diesem Zusammenhang
übernommene wechselmäßige Haftung – wie z. B. im Rahmen eines Scheck-Wechsel-Verfahrens – fortbesteht.
(b) Der Besteller ist berechtigt, über die Liefergegenstände im ordentlichen Geschäftsgang zu verfügen, solange er sei-
nen Verpflichtungen aus der Geschäftsbeziehung mit uns rechtzeitig nachkommt.
(c) Forderungen aus dem Verkauf von Waren, an denen uns Eigentumsrechte zustehen, oder aus einem sonstigen
Rechtsgrund (Versicherung, Schadensersatz....) tritt der Besteller schon jetzt im Umfang unseres Eigentumsanteils
an den verkauften Waren zur Sicherung an uns ab. Wir erklären bereits jetzt die Annahme dieser Abtretung.
(d) Eine Verarbeitung oder Vermischung nimmt der Besteller für uns vor, ohne dass hieraus für uns eine Verbindlichkeit
entsteht. Für den Fall der Verarbeitung oder Vermischung mit anderen, uns nicht gehörenden Sachen, überträgt der
Besteller schon jetzt zur Sicherung unserer Forderungen auf uns das Miteigentum an der neuen Sache im Verhält-
nis des Wertes der Vorbehaltsware zu den anderen verarbeiteten Sachen mit der Maßgabe, dass der Besteller die
neue Sache für uns unentgeltlich verwahrt.
(e) Verbindet oder vermischt der Besteller die gelieferten Waren entgeltlich mit einer Hauptsache Dritter, so tritt er be-
reits jetzt seine Vergütungsansprüche gegen den Dritten bis zur Höhe des Rechnungswertes der gelieferten Ware
zur Sicherung an uns ab. Wir erklären bereits jetzt die Annahme dieser Abtretung.
(f) Der Besteller ist zur Einziehung von Forderungen gegenüber Dritten auch nach erfolgter Abtretung an uns ermäch-
tigt. Unsere Befugnis, die betreffende Forderung selbst einzuziehen, bleibt hiervon unberührt, jedoch verpflichten wir
uns, dies nicht zu tun, solange der Besteller seinen Zahlungsverpflichtungen ordnungsgemäß nachkommt. Macht
der Besteller von der Einziehungsbefugnis Gebrauch, so steht uns der eingezogene Erlös in Höhe des zwischen
dem Besteller und uns vereinbarten Lieferpreises für die Vorbehaltsware zu. Aufgrund der abgetretenen Forderung
bei dem Besteller eingehende Wechsel werden hiermit an uns abgetreten und indossiert. Der Besteller verwahrt
die indossierten Wechsel für uns.
(g) Auf unser Verlangen hat uns der Besteller alle erforderlichen Auskünfte über den Bestand der in unserem Eigentum
stehenden Waren und über die an uns abgetretenen Forderungen zu geben sowie seine Abnehmer von der Abtre-
tung in Kenntnis zu setzen.
(h) Der Besteller ist verpflichtet, die Vorbehaltware sorgfältig zu verwahren und auf eigene Kosten gegen Abhanden-
kommen und Beschädigung zu versichern. Er tritt seine Ansprüche aus den Versicherungsverträgen hiermit im Vor-
aus an uns ab. Wir nehmen diese Abtretung bereits jetzt an. Ebenso tritt der Besteller seine Ansprüche gegen et-
next page waige Dritte, welche einen Schaden an der Vorbehaltsware oder deren Abhandenkommen verursacht haben, an
uns ab, wir nehmen diese Abtretung an.
(i) Kommt der Besteller mit seinen Zahlungsverpflichtungen uns gegenüber in Verzug oder verletzt er eine der sich aus
dem vereinbarten Eigentumsvorbehalt ergebenden Verpflichtungen, so wird die gesamte Restschuld – ungeachtet
evtl. bestehender vorhergehender Zahlungsvereinbarungen – sofort fällig. In diesem Fall sind wir berechtigt, die
Herausgabe des Liefergegenstandes zu verlangen und diesen beim Besteller abzuholen, ohne dass wir deswegen
zuvor vom Vertrag zurücktreten müssten. Das Recht des Bestellers zum Besitz an den Liefergegenständen endet
previous page mit Eintritt der Fälligkeit der Restschuld entsprechend der obigen Regelungen. In der Zurücknahme des Lieferge-
genstandes liegt ein Rücktritt vom Vertrag nur dann vor, wenn wir dies ausdrücklich schriftlich bestätigen. Bei Zah-
lungsverzug oder einer o.g. Pflichtverletzung des Bestellers sind wir auch berechtigt, den Abnehmern des Bestellers
die Abtretung der Forderungen des Bestellers an uns mitzuteilen und die Forderungen einzuziehen. Zudem sind wir
bei Zahlungsverzug, bzw. einer o.g. Pflichtverletzung des Bestellers, berechtigt, vom Vertrag zurückzutreten und
Schadensersatz wegen Nichterfüllung zu verlangen.
(j) Der Besteller ist verpflichtet, sämtliche unserer Rechte aus den vorstehenden Sicherungsbedingungen auch jeden
Dritten gegenüber geltend zu machen und zu wahren, insbesondere bei Pfändungsdrohungen auf unser Eigentum
hinzuweisen und uns jede trotzdem erfolgte Pfändung oder sonstige Beeinträchtigung unserer Eigentumsrechte un-
verzüglich anzuzeigen.
(k) Übersteigt der Wert der Sicherheiten unsere Forderungen um mehr als 10 v. H., so werden wir auf Verlangen des
Bestellers insoweit Sicherheiten nach unserer Wahl freigeben.

6. Anwendungstechnische Beratung
(a) Anwendungstechnische Beratung geben wir nach bestem Wissen. Alle Angaben und Auskünfte über Eignung und
Anwendung unserer Waren befreien den Besteller nicht von eigenen Prüfungen und Versuchen bezüglich der Eig-
nung der Produkte für die beabsichtigten Verfahren und Zwecke.
(b) Die Verjährungsfrist für Ansprüche aus fehlerhafter Beratung beträgt drei Jahre, beginnend ab dem Schluss des
Jahres, in dem der Anspruch entstanden ist. Beruhen die Ansprüche auf vorsätzlichem Handeln, finden die gesetz-
lichen Vorschriften zum Verjährungsbeginn Anwendung.

7. Untersuchungs- und Rügepflicht

(a) Der Besteller hat die Ware unverzüglich zu untersuchen und Mängel unverzüglich, spätestens vierzehn Tage nach
Eingang am Bestimmungsort, uns gegenüber (nicht gegenüber unseren Handelsvertretern und Handlungsreisen-
den) schriftlich zu rügen.
(b) Verborgene Mängel sind spätestens drei Werktage nach der Entdeckung schriftlich zu rügen.
(c) Zur Wahrung der Rügefrist genügt die rechtzeitige Absendung einer schriftlichen Mängelrüge unter genauer Be-
zeichnung der beanstandeten Mängel.
(d) Bei nicht rechtzeitiger Mitteilung von Beanstandungen oder Mängelrügen, gilt die Lieferung als genehmigt.
(e) Der Besteller hat – erforderlichenfalls durch eine Probeverarbeitung – zu prüfen, ob die gelieferte Ware für den vor-
gesehenen Einsatz geeignet ist.
(f) Erfüllt der Besteller die ihm entsprechend des Absatzes (e) obliegende Prüfungspflicht nicht, nicht rechtzeitig oder
nicht ordnungsgemäß, sind Mängelgewährleistungsansprüche oder sonstige Schadensersatzansprüche des Bestel-
lers uns gegenüber insoweit ausgeschlossen, als die Durchführung der Prüfung eingetretene Schäden vermindert
hätte. Im übrigen haften wir nur im Rahmen der Regelungen der Ziff. 8 und 9.
 4
8. Gewährleistung
(a) Ist der Liefergegenstand bei Gefahrübergang mit Sachmängeln behaftet, so hat der Besteller Anspruch auf Nach-
besserung oder Ersatzlieferung. Wir besitzen ein Wahlrecht, ob im konkreten Fall eine Ersatzlieferung oder Nach-
besserung erfolgt. Wir sind berechtigt, die Nachbesserung oder Ersatzlieferung zu verweigern, wenn sie mit einem
unverhältnismäßigen Aufwand verbunden wäre. Dem Besteller stehen dann nur die in Abs. (b) bestimmten Rechte
zu. Ein unverhältnismäßiger Aufwand für die gewählte Art der Nacherfüllung ist anzunehmen, wenn die Kosten der
Nacherfüllung den Wert der Sache bei Gefahrübergang um mindestens 10 % übersteigen.
(b) Gelingt es uns binnen einer angemessenen Nacherfüllungsfrist nicht, den Sachmangel zu beheben, so kann der
Besteller nach seiner Wahl den Preis mindern, vom Vertrag zurücktreten oder nach Maßgabe der Ziff. 9 Schadens-
ersatz verlangen. Ist die gewählte Nacherfüllung für den Käufer unzumutbar, stehen ihm die in Satz 1) bestimmten
Rechte sofort zu. Der Anspruch auf Rücktritt vom Vertrag und auf Schadensersatz ist im Fall unerheblicher Sach-
mängel ausgeschlossen.
(c) Die Gewährleistungsfrist beträgt 24 Monate. Sie beginnt mit dem Zeitpunkt der Ablieferung der bestellten Ware, spä-
testens mit der Rechnungsstellung; im Fall der durch den Besteller gewünschten Versendung oder der nicht recht-
zeitigen Abholung der Ware beginnt die Gewährleistungsfrist mit dem Zeitpunkt der Mitteilung der Versandbereit-
schaft.
(d) Ein Fall der Mängelgewährleistung liegt insbesondere dann nicht vor, wenn und soweit Schäden am Liefergegens-
tand oder an anderen Rechtsgütern des Bestellers auf nachfolgende Gründe zurückzuführen sind:
- fehlerhafte Angaben zu Einsatzzweck, -ort bzw. –bedingungen des Liefergegenstandes,
- fehlerhafte Weiterverarbeitung, Montage, Behandlung,
- fehlerhafte Installation des Liefergegenstandes durch den Besteller oder Dritte, es sei denn, die fehlerhafte In-
stallation beruht auf unseren Anweisungen,
- Nichtbeachtung der in der Bedienungsanleitung genannten oder von uns erteilten Anweisungen zu Inbetrieb-
nahme und Betrieb des Liefergegenstandes,
- Eingriffe nicht von uns autorisierter Personen oder Verwendung von nicht originalen Ersatzteilen oder Be-
triebsmitteln,
- normal üblicher oder übermäßiger Verschleiß, welcher nicht auf Produktions- oder Materialmängel zurückge-
führt werden kann,
- Überspannungsschäden, beispielsweise in Folge von Blitzeinschlägen,
- weiterhin ausgenommen sind Defekte, welche durch Überlastung, Schweißarbeiten oder sonstige äußere Ein-
flüsse verursacht wurden, die einem normal üblichen Einsatz nicht entsprechen,
- übermäßige Beanspruchung.
(e) Die vorstehend aufgeführte Gewährleistung wird nur in dem Umfang und in der Höhe erbracht, wie sie bei Einsatz
des Liefergegenstandes am vereinbarten Lieferobjekt besteht. Soweit sich die Aufwendungen dadurch erhöhen,
dass die gekaufte Sache an einen anderen Ort verbracht wird, hat der Besteller diese Mehrkosten zu tragen.
previous page (f) Wird die von uns gelieferte Ware vom Besteller oder von einem seiner Käufer an einen Endverbraucher weiterver-
kauft, gelten für die Mängelgewährleistungsrechte des Bestellers die gesetzlichen Vorschriften gemäß §§ 478, 479
BGB. Schadensersatz leisten wir allerdings nur im Rahmen der Ziff. 8 (b) und 9. Kommt der Besteller allerdings sei-
ner unter Ziff. 9) geregelten Untersuchungs-, Rüge- und Prüfungspflichten nicht, nicht rechtzeitig oder nicht ord-
nungsgemäß nach, erlöschen die dem Besteller uns gegenüber bestehenden Mängelgewährleistungsrechte.
(g) Von den durch die Nachbesserung bzw. Ersatzlieferung entstehenden unmittelbaren Kosten tragen wir – soweit sich
die Beanstandung als berechtigt herausstellt – die zum Zwecke der Nacherfüllung unmittelbar erforderlichen Auf-
wendungen, insbesondere die Kosten des Ersatzstückes einschl. des Versandes sowie die angemessenen Kosten
des Aus- und Einbaus. Im übrigen trägt der Besteller die Kosten.
(h) Jegliche Beseitigung von Sachmängeln gemäß Abs. (a) oder die Leistung gemäß Abs. (b), (f), (g) und Ziff. 9 erfol-
gen in jedem Fall ohne Anerkennung einer Rechtspflicht.

9. Sonstige Schadensersatzansprüche
Im Falle einer lediglich fahrlässigen Pflichtverletzung durch uns oder unsere Erfüllungsgehilfen ist unsere Haftung auf
den vertragstypischen, vorhersehbaren Schaden begrenzt, soweit keine grob fahrlässige Pflichtverletzung vorliegt. Dies
gilt nicht bei Verletzung einer wesentlichen Vertragspflicht und bei Verletzung des Lebens, des Körpers oder der Ge-
sundheit. Der Haftungsausschluss gilt ebenfalls nicht in den Fällen, in welchen nach dem Produkthaftungsgesetzt bei
Fehlern des Liefergegenstandes für Personen– oder Sachschäden an privat genutzten Gegenständen gehaftet wird.
Erbringen wir Schadensersatzleistungen, so erfolgt dies ohne Anerkennung einer Rechtspflicht.

10. Datenschutz
Wir sind berechtigt, die bezüglich der Geschäftsbeziehung oder im Zusammenhang mit dieser erhaltenen Daten über
den Besteller, gleich ob diese vom Besteller selbst oder von Dritten stammen, im Sinne des Bundesdatenschutzgesetzes
zu verarbeiten.

11. Gültigkeitsklausel
Sind einzelne Bestimmungen dieser Bedingungen ungültig, so bleiben die übrigen Vereinbarungen wirksam. Anstelle der
ungültigen Bedingung tritt diejenige, welche bei Ermittlung im Wege einer Auslegung dem wirtschaftlichen Zweck der
ungültigen Bestimmung am nächsten kommt.

12. Gerichtsstand und Erfüllungsort

(a) Erfüllungsort und Gerichtsstand – auch für Streitigkeiten im Urkunden-, Wechsel- oder Scheckprozess – ist im
kaufmännischen Verkehr unser Sitz, bzw. das für unseren Sitz gemäß §§ 12, 17 ZPO zuständige Gericht.
(b) Auf die Vertragsbeziehungen mit dem Besteller ist ausschließlich das Recht der Bundesrepublik Deutschland unter
Ausschluss des Übereinkommens der Vereinten Nationen über Verträge über den über den internationalen Wa-
renkauf (CISG) und des internationalen Privatrechtes anwendbar.